PR exp/15109:
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
56dd11f0 3@c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
31@set POWERPC
32@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
33@set Renesas
34@set SPU
35@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 36@set WIN32
e0001a05 37@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
38@end ifset
39@c man end
40
9160ea82
AM
41@ifnottex
42@dircategory Software development
43@direntry
252b5132 44* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
45@end direntry
46@end ifnottex
252b5132 47
0e9517a9 48@copying
e49e529d
JM
49This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
50@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
51@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
52@end ifset
53version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 54
56dd11f0 55Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 56
cf055d54 57Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 58under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
59or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
60with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
61Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 62section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 63@end copying
252b5132
RH
64@iftex
65@finalout
66@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 67@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 68@titlepage
71ba23f6 69@title The GNU linker
252b5132 70@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
71@subtitle @code{ld}
72@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
73@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
74@end ifset
252b5132
RH
75@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
76@author Steve Chamberlain
77@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
78@page
79
80@tex
81{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
82\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
83\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 84\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
85\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
86}
87\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
88@end tex
89
90@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 91@c man begin COPYRIGHT
56dd11f0 92Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 93
0285c67d 94Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 95under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
96or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
97with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
98Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 99section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 100@c man end
252b5132 101
252b5132
RH
102@end titlepage
103@end iftex
4ecceb71 104@contents
252b5132
RH
105@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
106
84ec0e6d 107@ifnottex
252b5132 108@node Top
71ba23f6 109@top LD
e49e529d
JM
110This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
111@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
112@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
113@end ifset
114version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 115
cf055d54 116This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
117Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
118in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 119
252b5132
RH
120@menu
121* Overview:: Overview
122* Invocation:: Invocation
123* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
124@ifset GENERIC
125* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
126@end ifset
127@ifclear GENERIC
128@ifset H8300
129* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
130@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
131@ifset Renesas
132* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
133@end ifset
134@ifset I960
135* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
136@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
137@ifset ARM
138* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
139@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
140@ifset M68HC11
141* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
142@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
146@ifset M68K
147* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
148@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
149@ifset POWERPC
150* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
151@end ifset
152@ifset POWERPC64
153* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
155@ifset SPU
156* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
157@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
158@ifset TICOFF
159* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
160@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
161@ifset WIN32
162* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
163@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
164@ifset XTENSA
165* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
166@end ifset
252b5132
RH
167@end ifclear
168@ifclear SingleFormat
169* BFD:: BFD
170@end ifclear
171@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
172
173* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
174* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 175* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 176* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 177@end menu
84ec0e6d 178@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
179
180@node Overview
181@chapter Overview
182
183@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
184@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 185
0879a67a 186@ifset man
0285c67d 187@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 188ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
189@c man end
190
191@c man begin SEEALSO
192ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
193the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
194@file{ld}.
195@c man end
196@end ifset
197
198@c man begin DESCRIPTION
199
ff5dcc92 200@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 201their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 202compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
205a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
206to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
207
0285c67d
NC
208@ifset man
209@c For the man only
ece2d90e 210This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
211@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
212language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
213@end ifset
214
252b5132 215@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
216This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
217to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
218write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
219@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
220available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
221@end ifclear
222
223Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
224linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
225execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 226@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
227(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
228
0285c67d
NC
229@c man end
230
252b5132
RH
231@node Invocation
232@chapter Invocation
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man begin DESCRIPTION
235
ff5dcc92 236The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
237and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
238you have many choices to control its behavior.
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man end
241
252b5132
RH
242@ifset UsesEnvVars
243@menu
244* Options:: Command Line Options
245* Environment:: Environment Variables
246@end menu
247
248@node Options
249@section Command Line Options
250@end ifset
251
252@cindex command line
253@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
254
255@c man begin OPTIONS
256
252b5132
RH
257The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
258practice few of them are used in any particular context.
259@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 260For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
261object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
262link a file @code{hello.o}:
263
264@smallexample
265ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
266@end smallexample
267
ff5dcc92 268This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
269result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
270the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
271directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
272
ff5dcc92 273Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
274point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
275as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
276which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
277files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
278different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
279occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
280option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
281noted in the descriptions below.
282
283@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
284Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
285together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
286options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
287an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
288
289Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
290specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
291and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
292are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
293message @samp{No input files}.
294
36f63dca 295If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
296assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
297augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
298linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
299permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
300or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
301@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
302script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
303extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
304to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
305the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
306
307For options whose names are a single letter,
308option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
309whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
310option that requires them.
311
312For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 313precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 314@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 315this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 316only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
317@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
318name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
319output.
320
321Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
322option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
323immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
324@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
325Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
326accepted.
252b5132 327
36f63dca
NC
328Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
329(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
330prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
331compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
332
333@smallexample
2509a395 334 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
335@end smallexample
336
337This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
338silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
339may also arise when passing options that require values through a
340driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
341a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
342and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
343the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
344
345@smallexample
346 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
347@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
348
349Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
350linker:
351
ff5dcc92 352@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 353@include at-file.texi
dff70155 354
2509a395
SL
355@kindex -a @var{keyword}
356@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
357This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
358argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
359@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
360@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
361to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
362
7ee314fa
AM
363@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
364@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
365Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
366@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
367specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
368will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
369finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 370it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 371This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 372interface.
7ee314fa 373
252b5132
RH
374@ifset I960
375@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
376@kindex -A @var{arch}
377@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
378@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
379@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
380In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
381Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
382@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
383the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 384archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
385family}, for details.
386
ff5dcc92 387Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
388other architecture families.
389@end ifset
390
391@ifclear SingleFormat
392@cindex binary input format
393@kindex -b @var{format}
394@kindex --format=@var{format}
395@cindex input format
396@cindex input format
397@item -b @var{input-format}
398@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
399@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
400file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 401@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 402that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 403configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 404to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
405default input format the most usual format on each machine.
406@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
407supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
408formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
409@xref{BFD}.
410
411You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
412binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
413linking object files of different formats), by including
414@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 415particular format.
252b5132
RH
416
417The default format is taken from the environment variable
418@code{GNUTARGET}.
419@ifset UsesEnvVars
420@xref{Environment}.
421@end ifset
422You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
423@code{TARGET};
424@ifclear man
425see @ref{Format Commands}.
426@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
427@end ifclear
428
429@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
430@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
431@cindex compatibility, MRI
432@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
433@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 434For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 435files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
436@ifclear man
437@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
438@end ifclear
439@ifset man
440the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
441@end ifset
442Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 443the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
444scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
445If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
446specified by any @samp{-L} options.
447
448@cindex common allocation
449@kindex -d
450@kindex -dc
451@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 452@item -d
252b5132
RH
453@itemx -dc
454@itemx -dp
455These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
456compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
457even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
458script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
459@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
460
7ee314fa
AM
461@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
462@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
463@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
464@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
465Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
466@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
467specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
468will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
469option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 470The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 471
252b5132
RH
472@cindex entry point, from command line
473@kindex -e @var{entry}
474@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 475@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
476@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
477Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
478program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
479named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
480and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
481base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
482@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
483and other ways of specifying the entry point.
484
b58f81ae
DJ
485@kindex --exclude-libs
486@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
487Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 488exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
489@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
490automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
491port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
492explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
493option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
494be treated as hidden.
495
e1c37eb5
DK
496@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
497@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
498Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
499should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
500into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
501may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
502used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
503the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
504match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
505command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
506of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
507regardless of this option.
508
252b5132
RH
509@cindex dynamic symbol table
510@kindex -E
511@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 512@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
513@item -E
514@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
515@itemx --no-export-dynamic
516When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
517option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
518all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
519set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
520
521If you do not use either of these options (or use the
522@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
523dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
524referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
525
526If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
527back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
528dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
529linking the program itself.
530
55255dae 531You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 532be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 533See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 534
8b747e1a
DK
535Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
536support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
537the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
538
36f63dca 539@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
540@cindex big-endian objects
541@cindex endianness
542@kindex -EB
543@item -EB
544Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
545
546@cindex little-endian objects
547@kindex -EL
548@item -EL
549Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 550@end ifclear
252b5132 551
2509a395
SL
552@kindex -f @var{name}
553@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
554@item -f @var{name}
555@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
556When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
557to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
558table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
559symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
560
561If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
562run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
563the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
564first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
565@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
566in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
567Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
568implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
569machine specific performance.
570
571This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
572will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
573
2509a395
SL
574@kindex -F @var{name}
575@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 576@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 577@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
578When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
579the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
580of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
581on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
582
583If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
584run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
585dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
586filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
587found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
588used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
589@var{name}.
590
ff5dcc92 591Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 592toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
593object files.
594@ifclear SingleFormat
595The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 596@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 597@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
598environment variable.
599@end ifclear
600The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
601creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 602
3dbf70a2 603@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
604@kindex -fini=@var{name}
605@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
606When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
607executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
608address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
609the function to call.
610
252b5132
RH
611@kindex -g
612@item -g
613Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
614
2509a395
SL
615@kindex -G @var{value}
616@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 617@cindex object size
2509a395 618@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
620Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
621@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
622MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
623sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
624
625@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 626@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 627@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 628@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
629@itemx -soname=@var{name}
630When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
631the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
632which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
633linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
634field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
635
636@kindex -i
637@cindex incremental link
638@item -i
639Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
640
3dbf70a2 641@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
642@kindex -init=@var{name}
643@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
644When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
645executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
646of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
647function to call.
648
252b5132 649@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 650@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 651@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 652@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
653@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
654Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
655list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
656If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 657will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 658will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 659
ff5dcc92 660On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
661files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
662and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
663called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
664@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
665indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
666to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
667@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
668
669The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
670specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
671was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
672command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
673archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
674the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
675
ff5dcc92 676See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
677archives multiple times.
678
679You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
680
681@ifset GENERIC
682This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 683if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
684behaviour of the AIX linker.
685@end ifset
686
687@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 688@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 689@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 690@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 691@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
692Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
693for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
694option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
695in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
696on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 697@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
698order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
699how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
700option is specified.
252b5132 701
9c8ebd6a
DJ
702If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
703by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
704
252b5132
RH
705@ifset UsesEnvVars
706The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 707@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
708some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
709@end ifset
710
711The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
712@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
713at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
714
715@cindex emulation
716@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 717@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
718Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
719emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
720
721If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
722@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
723
724Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
725configured.
726
727@cindex link map
728@kindex -M
729@kindex --print-map
730@item -M
731@itemx --print-map
732Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
733information about the link, including the following:
734
735@itemize @bullet
736@item
3b83e13a 737Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
738@item
739How common symbols are allocated.
740@item
741All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
742which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
743@item
744The values assigned to symbols.
745
746Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
747involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
748have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
749linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
750of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
751the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
752linker script containing:
753
754@smallexample
755 foo = 1
756 foo = foo * 4
757 foo = foo + 8
758@end smallexample
759
760will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
761option is used:
762
763@smallexample
764 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
765 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
766 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
767@end smallexample
768
769See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
770scripts.
252b5132
RH
771@end itemize
772
773@kindex -n
774@cindex read-only text
775@cindex NMAGIC
776@kindex --nmagic
777@item -n
778@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
779Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
780libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
781mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
782
783@kindex -N
784@kindex --omagic
785@cindex read/write from cmd line
786@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 787@item -N
252b5132
RH
788@itemx --omagic
789Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
790not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
791libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
792mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
793is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
794specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
795
796@kindex --no-omagic
797@cindex OMAGIC
798@item --no-omagic
799This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
800sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
801be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
802shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
803
804@kindex -o @var{output}
805@kindex --output=@var{output}
806@cindex naming the output file
807@item -o @var{output}
808@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 809Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
810option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
811script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
812
813@kindex -O @var{level}
814@cindex generating optimized output
815@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 816If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 817the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
818should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
819option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
820the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
821no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
822of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 823
a712da20
NC
824@kindex -q
825@kindex --emit-relocs
826@cindex retain relocations in final executable
827@item -q
828@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 829Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
830Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
831order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
832in larger executables.
833
dbab7a7b
NC
834This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
835
4f471f39
RS
836@kindex --force-dynamic
837@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
838@item --force-dynamic
839Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
840to VxWorks targets.
841
252b5132
RH
842@cindex partial link
843@cindex relocatable output
844@kindex -r
1049f94e 845@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 846@item -r
1049f94e 847@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 848Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 849turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
850linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
851magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
852@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 853@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
854If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
855linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
856constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
857
62bf86b4
HPN
858When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
859partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
860relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
861example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
862with input files in other formats at all.
863
252b5132
RH
864This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
865
866@kindex -R @var{file}
867@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
868@cindex symbol-only input
869@item -R @var{filename}
870@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
871Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
872relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
873to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
874programs. You may use this option more than once.
875
ff5dcc92 876For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 877followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 878the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
879
880@kindex -s
881@kindex --strip-all
882@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 883@item -s
252b5132
RH
884@itemx --strip-all
885Omit all symbol information from the output file.
886
887@kindex -S
888@kindex --strip-debug
889@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 890@item -S
252b5132
RH
891@itemx --strip-debug
892Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
893
894@kindex -t
895@kindex --trace
896@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 897@item -t
252b5132 898@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 899Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
900
901@kindex -T @var{script}
902@kindex --script=@var{script}
903@cindex script files
904@item -T @var{scriptfile}
905@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
906Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 907@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 908@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
909output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
910the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
911specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
912options accumulate.
252b5132 913
14be8564
L
914@kindex -dT @var{script}
915@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
916@cindex script files
917@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
918@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
919Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
920
921This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
922processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
923command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
924@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
925behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
926command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
927the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
928@samp{gcc}).
929
252b5132
RH
930@kindex -u @var{symbol}
931@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
932@cindex undefined symbol
933@item -u @var{symbol}
934@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
935Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
936symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
937modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
938different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
939option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
940
941@kindex -Ur
942@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 943@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
944For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
945@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 946turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
947@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
948It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
949with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
950be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
951@samp{-r} for the others.
952
577a0623
AM
953@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
954@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
955Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
956@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
957missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
958specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
959multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
960input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
961in a linker script.
a854a4a7 962
252b5132
RH
963@kindex -v
964@kindex -V
965@kindex --version
966@cindex version
967@item -v
968@itemx --version
969@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 970Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
971lists the supported emulations.
972
973@kindex -x
974@kindex --discard-all
975@cindex deleting local symbols
976@item -x
977@itemx --discard-all
978Delete all local symbols.
979
980@kindex -X
981@kindex --discard-locals
982@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 983@item -X
252b5132 984@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
985Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
986system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
987or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
988
989@kindex -y @var{symbol}
990@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
991@cindex symbol tracing
992@item -y @var{symbol}
993@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
994Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
995option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
996to prepend an underscore.
997
998This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
999don't know where the reference is coming from.
1000
1001@kindex -Y @var{path}
1002@item -Y @var{path}
1003Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1004for Solaris compatibility.
1005
1006@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1007@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1008The recognized keywords are:
1009@table @samp
1010
1011@item combreloc
1012Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1013lookup caching possible.
1014
1015@item defs
560e09e9 1016Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1017shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1018
6aa29e7b
JJ
1019@item execstack
1020Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1021
b039ef04
L
1022@item global
1023This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1024the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1025of subsequently loaded libraries.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
04c3a755
NS
1096@item stack-size=@var{value}
1097Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1098Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1099@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1100
cd6d6c15
NC
1101@end table
1102
ece2d90e 1103Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1104
1105@kindex -(
1106@cindex groups of archives
1107@item -( @var{archives} -)
1108@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1109The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1110either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1111
1112The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1113references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1114the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1115archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1116object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1117would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1118they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1119resolved.
1120
1121Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1122it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1123more archives.
1124
69da35b5
NC
1125@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1126@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1127@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1128@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1129Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1130recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1131and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1132the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1133behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1134so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1135restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1136
4a43e768
AM
1137@kindex --as-needed
1138@kindex --no-as-needed
1139@item --as-needed
1140@itemx --no-as-needed
1141This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1142on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1143the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1144on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1145needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1146emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1147non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1148the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1149non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1150Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1151the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1152needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1153from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1154
e56f61be
L
1155@kindex --add-needed
1156@kindex --no-add-needed
1157@item --add-needed
1158@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1159These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1160their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1161options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1162and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1163
252b5132
RH
1164@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1165@item -assert @var{keyword}
1166This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1167
1168@kindex -Bdynamic
1169@kindex -dy
1170@kindex -call_shared
1171@item -Bdynamic
1172@itemx -dy
1173@itemx -call_shared
1174Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1175for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1176default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1177for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1178multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1179@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1180
a1ab1d2a
UD
1181@kindex -Bgroup
1182@item -Bgroup
1183Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1184section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1185object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1186@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1187only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1188
252b5132
RH
1189@kindex -Bstatic
1190@kindex -dn
1191@kindex -non_shared
1192@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1193@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1194@itemx -dn
1195@itemx -non_shared
1196@itemx -static
1197Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1198platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1199variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1200may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1201library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1202option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1203option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1204shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1205references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1206libraries.
252b5132
RH
1207
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic
1209@item -Bsymbolic
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1211definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1212for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1213within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1214platforms which support shared libraries.
1215
40b36307
L
1216@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1217@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1218When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1219symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1220This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1221libraries.
1222
55255dae
L
1223@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1224@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1225Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1226typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1227global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1228within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1229to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1230in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1231which support shared libraries.
1232
1233The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1234scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1235
40b36307
L
1236@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1237@item --dynamic-list-data
1238Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1239
1240@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1241@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1242Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1243is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1244
0b8a70d9
L
1245@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1246@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1247Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1248
252b5132
RH
1249@kindex --check-sections
1250@kindex --no-check-sections
1251@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1252@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1253Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1254been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1255perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1256suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1257allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1258restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1259Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1260force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1261option.
252b5132 1262
ddbb8a31
NC
1263@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1264@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1265@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1266@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1267This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1268by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1269command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1270output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1271input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1272specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1273follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1274behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1275
1276This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1277libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1278mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1279their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1280required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1281the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1282dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1283symbols.
1284
252b5132
RH
1285@cindex cross reference table
1286@kindex --cref
1287@item --cref
1288Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1289generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1290Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1291
1292The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1293easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1294sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1295symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1296definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1297
4818e05f
AM
1298@cindex common allocation
1299@kindex --no-define-common
1300@item --no-define-common
1301This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1302The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1303@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1304
1305The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1306the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1307of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1308forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1309Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1310from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1311This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1312and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1313duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1314paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1315
252b5132 1316@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1317@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1318@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1319Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1320address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1321times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1322limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1323context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1324symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1325constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1326using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1327Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1328space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1329@var{expression}.
1330
1331@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1332@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1333@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1334@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1335@itemx --no-demangle
1336These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1337and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1338present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1339underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1340mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1341different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1342to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1343demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1344is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1345
1346@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1347@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1348@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1349@item -I@var{file}
1350@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1351Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1352generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1353linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1354doing.
1355
7ce691ae 1356@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1357@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1358@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1359@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1360Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1361with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1362
252b5132
RH
1363@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1364@item --force-exe-suffix
1365Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1366
1367If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1368@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1369the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1370option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1371Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1372it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1373
1374@kindex --gc-sections
1375@kindex --no-gc-sections
1376@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1377@item --gc-sections
1378@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1379Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1380targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1381performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1382@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1383
d5465ba2
AM
1384@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1385examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1386symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1387command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1388referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1389libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1390referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1391the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1392relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1393
ac69cbc6 1394This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1395@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1396specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1397a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1398
c17d87de
NC
1399@kindex --print-gc-sections
1400@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1401@cindex garbage collection
1402@item --print-gc-sections
1403@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1404List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1405printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1406collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1407default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1408be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1409line.
1410
30824704
RM
1411@kindex --print-output-format
1412@cindex output format
1413@item --print-output-format
1414Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1415other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1416in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1417
252b5132
RH
1418@cindex help
1419@cindex usage
1420@kindex --help
1421@item --help
1422Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1423
ea20a7da
CC
1424@kindex --target-help
1425@item --target-help
1426Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1427
2509a395
SL
1428@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1429@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1430Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1431@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1432
1433@cindex memory usage
1434@kindex --no-keep-memory
1435@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1436@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1437symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1438instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1439necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1440while linking a large executable.
1441
1442@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1443@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1444@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1445@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1446Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1447is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1448The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1449behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1450libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1451
aa713662
L
1452@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1453@kindex -z muldefs
1454@item --allow-multiple-definition
1455@itemx -z muldefs
1456Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1457report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1458first definition will be used.
1459
b79e8c78 1460@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1461@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1462@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1463@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1464Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1465This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1466determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1467shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1468how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1469
903249d7
NC
1470The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1471referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1472an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1473a shared library.
1474
1475The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1476libraries specified at link time are that:
1477
1478@itemize @bullet
1479@item
1480A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1481that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1482resolvable at load time.
1483@item
1484There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1485symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1486
1487The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1488select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1489architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1490appropriate memset function.
1491@end itemize
b79e8c78 1492
31941635
L
1493@kindex --no-undefined-version
1494@item --no-undefined-version
1495Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1496it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1497will be issued instead.
1498
3e3b46e5
PB
1499@kindex --default-symver
1500@item --default-symver
1501Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1502exported symbols.
1503
1504@kindex --default-imported-symver
1505@item --default-imported-symver
1506Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1507imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1508
252b5132
RH
1509@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1510@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1511Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1512files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1513been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1514This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1515errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1516have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1517inappropriate.
1518
fe7929ce
AM
1519@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1520@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1521Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1522library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1523
252b5132
RH
1524@kindex --no-whole-archive
1525@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1526Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1527archive files.
1528
1529@cindex output file after errors
1530@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1531@item --noinhibit-exec
1532Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1533Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1534errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1535when it issues any error whatsoever.
1536
0a9c1c8e
CD
1537@kindex -nostdlib
1538@item -nostdlib
1539Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1540command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1541(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1542
252b5132 1543@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1544@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1545@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1546@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1547file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1548@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1549object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1550object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1551should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1552usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1553name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1554list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1555command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1556this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1557@end ifclear
1558
36af4a4e
JJ
1559@kindex -pie
1560@kindex --pic-executable
1561@item -pie
1562@itemx --pic-executable
1563@cindex position independent executables
1564Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1565ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1566libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1567address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1568normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1569defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1570
252b5132
RH
1571@kindex -qmagic
1572@item -qmagic
1573This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1574
1575@kindex -Qy
1576@item -Qy
1577This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1578
1579@kindex --relax
1580@cindex synthesizing linker
1581@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1582@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1583@item --relax
28d5f677 1584@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1585An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1586@ifset GENERIC
1587This option is only supported on a few targets.
1588@end ifset
1589@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1590@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1591@end ifset
1592@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1593@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1594@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1595@ifset XTENSA
1596@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1597@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1598@ifset M68HC11
1599@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1600@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1601@ifset POWERPC
1602@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1603@end ifset
252b5132 1604
28d5f677
NC
1605On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1606global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1607addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1608synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1609instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1610
1611On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1612debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1613@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1614This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1615family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1616@end ifset
1617
1618@ifset GENERIC
1619On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1620but ignored.
1621@end ifset
1622
28d5f677
NC
1623On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1624@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1625
252b5132
RH
1626@cindex retaining specified symbols
1627@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1628@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1629@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1630@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1631Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1632discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1633symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1634@ifset GENERIC
1635(such as VxWorks)
1636@end ifset
1637where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1638run-time memory.
1639
1640@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1641or symbols needed for relocations.
1642
1643You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1644line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1645
1646@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1647@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1648@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1649@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1650Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1651linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1652arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1653them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1654also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1655objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1656@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1657ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1658@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1659
ff5dcc92 1660The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1661SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1662@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1663runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1664options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1665gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1666file systems.
252b5132 1667
ff5dcc92 1668For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1669followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1670the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1671@end ifset
1672
1673@ifset GENERIC
1674@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1675@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1676@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1677When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1678happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1679of the input files.
1680
1681When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1682non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1683shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1684explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1685specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1686@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1687either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1688appearing multiple times.
1689
28c309a2
NC
1690This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1691that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1692is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1693runtime linker would do.
1694
252b5132 1695The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1696libraries:
252b5132
RH
1697@enumerate
1698@item
ff5dcc92 1699Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1700@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1701Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1702between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1703specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1704used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1705at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1706by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1707the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1708@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1709On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1710@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1711environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1712@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1713On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1714directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1715@item
a1b8d843 1716For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1717variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1718@item
ec4eb78a
L
1719For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1720@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1721libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1722@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1723@item
252b5132
RH
1724The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1725@item
1726For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1727exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1728@end enumerate
1729
1730If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1731warning and continue with the link.
1732@end ifset
1733
1734@kindex -shared
1735@kindex -Bshareable
1736@item -shared
1737@itemx -Bshareable
1738@cindex shared libraries
1739Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1740and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1741shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1742undefined symbols in the link.
1743
252b5132 1744@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1745@item --sort-common
1746@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1747@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1748This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1749ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1750sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1751eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1752between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1753specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1754
2509a395
SL
1755@kindex --sort-section=name
1756@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1757This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1758patterns in the linker script.
1759
2509a395
SL
1760@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1761@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1762This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1763patterns in the linker script.
1764
252b5132 1765@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1766@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1767Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1768each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1769size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1770
1771@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1772@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1773Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1774output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1775This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1776certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1777cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1778that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1779support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1780input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1781more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1782many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1783
1784@kindex --stats
1785@item --stats
1786Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1787as execution time and memory usage.
1788
2509a395 1789@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1790@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1791Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1792configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1793that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1794
252b5132
RH
1795@kindex --traditional-format
1796@cindex traditional format
1797@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1798For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1799the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1800use the traditional format instead.
1801
1802@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1803For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1804symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1805full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1806@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1807trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1808combine duplicate entries.
1809
2509a395
SL
1810@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1811@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1812Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1813address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1814times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1815line.
1816@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1817for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1818@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1819should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1820sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1821
2509a395
SL
1822@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1823@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1824@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1825@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1826@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1827@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1828@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1829Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1830@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1831
2509a395
SL
1832@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1833@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1834@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1835When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1836of the first byte of the text segment.
1837
9d5777a3
RM
1838@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1839@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1840@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1841When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1842the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1843text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1844
0d705e9f
AM
1845@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1846@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1847@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1848When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1849model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1850
560e09e9
NC
1851@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1852@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1853Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1854values for @samp{method}:
1855
1856@table @samp
1857@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1858Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1859
1860@item report-all
da8bce14 1861Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1862
1863@item ignore-in-object-files
1864Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1865ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1866
1867@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1868Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1869ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1870when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1871libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1872command line.
1873@end table
1874
1875The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1876by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1877
1878Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1879unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1880can change this to a warning.
1881
1715a13c
L
1882@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1883@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1884@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1885@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1886Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1887supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1888the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1889argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1890
1891@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1892@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1893@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1894Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1895used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1896about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1897is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1898see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1899use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1900symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1901@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1902
7ce691ae 1903@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1904@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1905@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1906@item --warn-common
1907Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1908a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1909but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1910you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1911Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1912warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1913
1914There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1915
1916@table @samp
1917@item int i = 1;
1918A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1919file.
1920
1921@item extern int i;
1922An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1923There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1924variable somewhere.
1925
1926@item int i;
1927A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1928variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1929The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1930single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1931size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1932a definition of the same variable.
1933@end table
1934
1935The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1936Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1937just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1938encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1939a common symbol.
1940
1941@enumerate
1942@item
1943Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1944definition for the symbol.
1945@smallexample
1946@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1947 overridden by definition
1948@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1949@end smallexample
1950
1951@item
1952Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1953the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1954except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1955@smallexample
1956@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1957 overriding common
1958@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1959@end smallexample
1960
1961@item
1962Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1963@smallexample
1964@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1965 of `@var{symbol}'
1966@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1967@end smallexample
1968
1969@item
1970Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1971@smallexample
1972@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1973 overridden by larger common
1974@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1975@end smallexample
1976
1977@item
1978Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1979the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1980encountered in a different order.
1981@smallexample
1982@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1983 overriding smaller common
1984@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1985@end smallexample
1986@end enumerate
1987
1988@kindex --warn-constructors
1989@item --warn-constructors
1990Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1991object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1992detect the use of global constructors.
1993
1994@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1995@item --warn-multiple-gp
1996Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1997This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1998Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1999section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2000of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2001base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2002base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2003bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2004large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2005values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2006option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2007
2008@kindex --warn-once
2009@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2010@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2011@item --warn-once
2012Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2013which refers to it.
2014
2015@kindex --warn-section-align
2016@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2017@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2018@item --warn-section-align
2019Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2020alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2021The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2022is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2023the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2024
8fdd7217
NC
2025@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2026@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2027Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2028
a0c402a5
L
2029@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2030@item --warn-alternate-em
2031Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2032
560e09e9
NC
2033@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2034@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2035If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2036@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2037This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2038
2039@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2040@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2041This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2042it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2043
252b5132
RH
2044@kindex --whole-archive
2045@cindex including an entire archive
2046@item --whole-archive
2047For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2048@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2049in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2050files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2051library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2052library. This option may be used more than once.
2053
7ec229ce 2054Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2055about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2056Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2057list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2058your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2059
2509a395
SL
2060@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2061@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2062Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2063@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2064undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2065@var{symbol}.
2066
2067This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2068wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2069wishes to call the system function, it should call
2070@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2071
2072Here is a trivial example:
2073
2074@smallexample
2075void *
cc2f008e 2076__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2077@{
cc2f008e 2078 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2079 return __real_malloc (c);
2080@}
2081@end smallexample
2082
ff5dcc92 2083If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2084all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2085instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2086call the real @code{malloc} function.
2087
2088You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2089links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2090you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2091file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2092call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2093
6aa29e7b
JJ
2094@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2095@item --eh-frame-hdr
2096Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2097@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2098
e41b3a13
JJ
2099@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2100@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2101Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2102generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2103if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2104
6c1439be
L
2105@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2106@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2107@item --enable-new-dtags
2108@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2109This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2110systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2111@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2112and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2113If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2114created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2115those options are only available for ELF systems.
2116
2d643429 2117@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2118@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2119Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2120close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2121time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2122increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2123value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2124
fdc90cb4
JJ
2125@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2126@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2127Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2128@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2129new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2130the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2131hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2132
35835446
JR
2133@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2134@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2135This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2136linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2137for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2138about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2139
4f9c04f7 2140Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21411021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2142run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2143has been used.
2144
2145The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2146enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2147
c0065db7
RM
2148@kindex --build-id
2149@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2150@item --build-id
2151@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2152Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2153The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2154file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2155@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2156parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2157@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2158@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2159an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2160characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2161omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2162
2163The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2164that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2165unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2166to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2167file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2168string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2169
2170Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2171@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2172@end table
2173
0285c67d
NC
2174@c man end
2175
36f63dca 2176@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2177
0285c67d
NC
2178@c man begin OPTIONS
2179
ff5dcc92 2180The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2181the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2182normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2183use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2184@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2185like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2186symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2187object file).
2188
2189In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2190support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2191PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2192values by either a space or an equals sign.
2193
ff5dcc92 2194@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2195
2196@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2197@item --add-stdcall-alias
2198If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2199as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2200[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2201
2202@kindex --base-file
2203@item --base-file @var{file}
2204Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2205addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2206@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2207[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2208
2209@kindex --dll
2210@item --dll
2211Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2212@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2213file.
bb10df36 2214[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2215
88183869
DK
2216@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2217@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2218@item --enable-long-section-names
2219@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2220The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2221the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2222for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2223fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2224to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2225allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2226disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2227generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2228as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2229with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2230GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2231information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2232option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2233section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2234when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2235image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2236[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2237
252b5132
RH
2238@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2239@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2240@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2241@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2242If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2243do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2244only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2245resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2246undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2247@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2248to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2249warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2250import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2251to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2252feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2253@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2254mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2255[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2256
522f09cd
KT
2257@kindex --leading-underscore
2258@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2259@item --leading-underscore
2260@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2261For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2262in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2263disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2264
252b5132
RH
2265@cindex DLLs, creating
2266@kindex --export-all-symbols
2267@item --export-all-symbols
2268If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2269be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2270otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2271explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2272attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2273option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2274@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2275@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2276exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2277re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2278such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2279@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2280@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2281Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2282not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2283extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2284(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2285These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2286@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2287@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2288@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2289@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2290[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2291
2292@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2293@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2294Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2295exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2296[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2297
2927aaca
NC
2298@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2299@item --exclude-all-symbols
2300Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2301[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2302
252b5132
RH
2303@kindex --file-alignment
2304@item --file-alignment
2305Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2306file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2307512.
bb10df36 2308[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2309
2310@cindex heap size
2311@kindex --heap
2312@item --heap @var{reserve}
2313@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2314Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2315to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2316committed.
bb10df36 2317[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2318
2319@cindex image base
2320@kindex --image-base
2321@item --image-base @var{value}
2322Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2323the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2324is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2325your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2326other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2327for dlls.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@kindex --kill-at
2331@item --kill-at
2332If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2333symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2334[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2335
26d2d8a2
BF
2336@kindex --large-address-aware
2337@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2338If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2339header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2340greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2341or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2342section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2343[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2344
252b5132
RH
2345@kindex --major-image-version
2346@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2347Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2348[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2349
2350@kindex --major-os-version
2351@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2352Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2353[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2354
2355@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2356@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2357Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2358[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2359
2360@kindex --minor-image-version
2361@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2362Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2363[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2364
2365@kindex --minor-os-version
2366@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2367Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2369
2370@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2371@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2372Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2373[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2374
2375@cindex DEF files, creating
2376@cindex DLLs, creating
2377@kindex --output-def
2378@item --output-def @var{file}
2379The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2380file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2381(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2382library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2383automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2384[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2385
b044cda1
CW
2386@cindex DLLs, creating
2387@kindex --out-implib
2388@item --out-implib @var{file}
2389The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2390import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2391import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2392may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2393makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2394creation step.
bb10df36 2395[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2396
2397@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2398@item --enable-auto-image-base
2399Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2400using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2401from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2402collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2403avoided.
bb10df36 2404[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2405
2406@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2407@item --disable-auto-image-base
2408Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2409user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2410default.
bb10df36 2411[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2412
2413@cindex DLLs, linking to
2414@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2415@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2416When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2417search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2418@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2419between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2420uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2421@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2422[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2423
2424@kindex --enable-auto-import
2425@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2426Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2427DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2428building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2429'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2430to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2431specification published by Microsoft.
2432
e2a83dd0
NC
2433Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2434data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2435placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2436around a problem with consts that is described here:
2437http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2438
4d8907ac
DS
2439Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2440see this message:
0d888aac 2441
ece2d90e 2442"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2443documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2444
ece2d90e
NC
2445This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2446ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2447allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2448fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2449constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2450multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2451this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2452of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2453the warning, and exit.
2454
2455There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2456data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2457
2fa9fc65
NC
2458One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2459of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2460this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2461
c0065db7
RM
2462A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2463that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2464there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2465a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2466
2467@example
2468extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2469extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2470 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2471@end example
2472
2473or
2474
2475@example
2476extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2477extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2478 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2479@end example
2480
c0065db7 2481For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2482is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2483
2484@example
2485extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2486extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2487 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2488@end example
2489
c406afaf
NC
2490or
2491
2492@example
2493extern long long extern_ll;
2494extern_ll -->
2495 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2496@end example
2497
2fa9fc65 2498A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2499'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2500@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2501requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2502building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2503merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2504between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2505constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2506
2507Original:
2508@example
2509--foo.h
2510extern int arr[];
2511--foo.c
2512#include "foo.h"
2513void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2514 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2515@}
2516@end example
2517
2518Solution 1:
2519@example
2520--foo.h
2521extern int arr[];
2522--foo.c
2523#include "foo.h"
2524void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2525 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2526 volatile int *parr = arr;
2527 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2528@}
2529@end example
2530
2531Solution 2:
2532@example
2533--foo.h
2534/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2535#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2536 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2537#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2538#else
2539#define FOO_IMPORT
2540#endif
2541extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2542--foo.c
2543#include "foo.h"
2544void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2545 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2546@}
2547@end example
2548
c0065db7 2549A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2550library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2551for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2552functions).
bb10df36 2553[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2554
2555@kindex --disable-auto-import
2556@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2557Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2558@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2560
2fa9fc65
NC
2561@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2562@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2563If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2564that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2565a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2566environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2568
2569@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2570@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2571Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2572DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2574
b044cda1
CW
2575@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2576@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2577Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2578[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2579
252b5132
RH
2580@kindex --section-alignment
2581@item --section-alignment
2582Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2583addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2584[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2585
2586@cindex stack size
2587@kindex --stack
2588@item --stack @var{reserve}
2589@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2590Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2591to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2592committed.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2594
2595@kindex --subsystem
2596@item --subsystem @var{which}
2597@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2598@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2599Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2600legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2601@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2602the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2603@var{which}.
bb10df36 2604[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2605
2f563b51
DK
2606The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2607of the PE file header:
2608[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2609
2610@kindex --dynamicbase
2611@item --dynamicbase
2612The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2613randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2614Vista for i386 PE targets.
2615
2616@kindex --forceinteg
2617@item --forceinteg
2618Code integrity checks are enforced.
2619
2620@kindex --nxcompat
2621@item --nxcompat
2622The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2623This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2624
2625@kindex --no-isolation
2626@item --no-isolation
2627Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2628
2629@kindex --no-seh
2630@item --no-seh
2631The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2632this image.
2633
2634@kindex --no-bind
2635@item --no-bind
2636Do not bind this image.
2637
2638@kindex --wdmdriver
2639@item --wdmdriver
2640The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2641
2f563b51
DK
2642@kindex --tsaware
2643@item --tsaware
2644The image is Terminal Server aware.
2645
252b5132
RH
2646@end table
2647
0285c67d
NC
2648@c man end
2649
ac145307
BS
2650@ifset C6X
2651@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2652
2653@c man begin OPTIONS
2654
2655The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2656libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2657all executables use an index of 0.
2658
2659@table @gcctabopt
2660
2661@kindex --dsbt-size
2662@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2663This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2664or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2665entries.
2666
2667@kindex --dsbt-index
2668@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2669This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2670to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2671executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2672@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2673
fbd9ad90
PB
2674@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2675The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2676exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2677
ac145307
BS
2678@end table
2679
2680@c man end
2681@end ifset
2682
93fd0973
SC
2683@ifset M68HC11
2684@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2685
2686@c man begin OPTIONS
2687
2688The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2689memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2690
2691@table @gcctabopt
2692
2693@kindex --no-trampoline
2694@item --no-trampoline
2695This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2696is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2697instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2698
2699@kindex --bank-window
2700@item --bank-window @var{name}
2701This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2702the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2703The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2704paging and addresses within the memory window.
2705
2706@end table
2707
2708@c man end
2709@end ifset
2710
7fb9f789
NC
2711@ifset M68K
2712@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2713
2714@c man begin OPTIONS
2715
2716The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2717when linking for 68K targets.
2718
2719@table @gcctabopt
2720
2721@kindex --got
2722@item --got=@var{type}
2723This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2724@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2725@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2726Info entry for @file{ld}.
2727
2728@end table
2729
2730@c man end
2731@end ifset
2732
252b5132
RH
2733@ifset UsesEnvVars
2734@node Environment
2735@section Environment Variables
2736
0285c67d
NC
2737@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2738
560e09e9 2739You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2740@ifclear SingleFormat
2741@code{GNUTARGET},
2742@end ifclear
2743@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2744
36f63dca 2745@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2746@kindex GNUTARGET
2747@cindex default input format
2748@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2749use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2750of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2751@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2752of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2753attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2754this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2755there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2756object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2757BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2758in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2759@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2760
2761@kindex LDEMULATION
2762@cindex default emulation
2763@cindex emulation, default
2764@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2765@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2766behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2767available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2768the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2769variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2770linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2771
2772@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2773@cindex demangling, default
2774Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2775@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2776default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2777a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2778may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2779options.
2780
0285c67d
NC
2781@c man end
2782@end ifset
2783
252b5132
RH
2784@node Scripts
2785@chapter Linker Scripts
2786
2787@cindex scripts
2788@cindex linker scripts
2789@cindex command files
2790Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2791written in the linker command language.
2792
2793The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2794the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2795the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2796more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2797direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2798described below.
2799
2800The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2801yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2802linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2803to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2804such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2805
2806You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2807line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2808default linker script.
2809
2810You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2811to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2812Linker Scripts}.
2813
2814@menu
2815* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2816* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2817* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2818* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2819* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2820* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2821* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2822* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2823* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2824* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2825* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2826@end menu
2827
2828@node Basic Script Concepts
2829@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2830@cindex linker script concepts
2831We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2832describe the linker script language.
2833
2834The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2835file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2836@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2837The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2838purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2839among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2840section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2841in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2842
2843Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2844also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2845contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2846the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2847A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2848area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2849loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2850which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2851of debugging information.
2852
2853Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2854first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2855the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2856@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2857section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2858same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2859is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2860(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2861based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2862RAM address would be the VMA.
2863
2864You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2865program with the @samp{-h} option.
2866
2867Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2868@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2869has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2870information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2871will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2872static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2873referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2874
2875You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2876program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2877option.
2878
2879@node Script Format
2880@section Linker Script Format
2881@cindex linker script format
2882Linker scripts are text files.
2883
2884You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2885either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2886symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2887generally ignored.
2888
2889Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2890If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2891otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2892double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2893file name.
2894
2895You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2896@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2897to whitespace.
2898
2899@node Simple Example
2900@section Simple Linker Script Example
2901@cindex linker script example
2902@cindex example of linker script
2903Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2904
2905The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2906@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2907memory layout of the output file.
2908
2909The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2910describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2911code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2912@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2913Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2914your input files.
2915
2916For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29170x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2918linker script which will do that:
2919@smallexample
2920SECTIONS
2921@{
2922 . = 0x10000;
2923 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2924 . = 0x8000000;
2925 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2926 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2927@}
2928@end smallexample
2929
2930You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2931followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2932descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2933
252b5132
RH
2934The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2935sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2936counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2937other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2938current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2939incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2940@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2941
2942The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2943required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2944after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2945which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2946wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2947means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2948
2949Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2950@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2951@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2952
2953The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2954the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2955at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2956output section, the value of the location counter will be
2957@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2958effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2959immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2960
2961The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2962alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2963example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2964sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2965may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2966sections.
2967
2968That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2969
2970@node Simple Commands
2971@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2972@cindex linker script simple commands
2973In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2974
2975@menu
2976* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2977* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2978@ifclear SingleFormat
2979* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2980@end ifclear
2981
4a93e180 2982* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2983* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2984@end menu
2985
2986@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2987@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2988@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2989@cindex start of execution
2990@cindex first instruction
2991@cindex entry point
2992The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2993point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2994entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2995@smallexample
2996ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2997@end smallexample
2998
2999There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3000entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3001stopping when one of them succeeds:
3002@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3003@item
252b5132 3004the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3005@item
252b5132 3006the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3007@item
3ab904c4
NC
3008the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3009targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3010check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3011@item
252b5132 3012the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3013@item
252b5132
RH
3014The address @code{0}.
3015@end itemize
3016
3017@node File Commands
36f63dca 3018@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3019@cindex linker script file commands
3020Several linker script commands deal with files.
3021
3022@table @code
3023@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3024@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3025@cindex including a linker script
3026Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3027be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3028with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
302910 levels deep.
3030
4006703d
NS
3031You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3032@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3033
252b5132
RH
3034@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3035@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3036@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3037@cindex input files in linker scripts
3038@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3039@cindex linker script input object files
3040The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3041in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3042
3043For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3044a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3045then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3046
3047In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3048script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3049
e3f2db7f
AO
3050In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3051with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3052located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3053for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3054open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3055linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3056description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3057
ff5dcc92 3058If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3059name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3060@samp{-l}.
3061
3062When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3063files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3064script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3065
3066@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3067@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3068@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3069@cindex grouping input files
3070The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3071files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3072new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3073in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3074
b717d30e
JJ
3075@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3076@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3077@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3078This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3079commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3080as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3081with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3082when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3083@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3084and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3085setting afterwards.
3086
252b5132
RH
3087@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3088@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3089@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3090The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3091@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3092@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3093Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3094precedence.
3095
3096You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3097output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3098
3099@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3100@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3101@cindex library search path in linker script
3102@cindex archive search path in linker script
3103@cindex search path in linker script
3104The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3105@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3106@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3107on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3108are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3109the command line option are searched first.
3110
3111@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3112@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3113@cindex first input file
3114The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3115that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3116though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3117when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3118first file.
3119@end table
3120
3121@ifclear SingleFormat
3122@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3123@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3124A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3125
3126@table @code
3127@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3128@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3129@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3130@cindex output file format in linker script
3131The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3132output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3133exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3134(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3135line option takes precedence.
3136
3137You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3138formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3139This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3140desired endianness.
3141
3142If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3143will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3144output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3145used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3146
3147For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3148command:
3149@smallexample
3150OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3151@end smallexample
3152This says that the default format for the output file is
3153@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3154option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3155format.
3156
3157@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3158@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3159@cindex input file format in linker script
3160The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3161files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3162This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3163(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3164is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3165command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3166@end table
3167@end ifclear
3168
4a93e180
NC
3169@node REGION_ALIAS
3170@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3171@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3172@cindex region alias
3173@cindex region names
3174
3175Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3176@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3177
3178@smallexample
3179REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3180@end smallexample
3181
3182The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3183memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3184to memory regions. An example follows.
3185
3186Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3187memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3188that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3189non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3190access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3191read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3192sections:
3193
3194@itemize @bullet
3195@item
3196@code{.text} program code;
3197@item
3198@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3199@item
3200@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3201@item
3202@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3203@end itemize
3204
3205The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3206part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3207output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3208systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3209@code{C}:
3210@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3211@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3212@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3213@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3214@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3215@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3216@end multitable
3217The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3218loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3219the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3220the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3221
3222The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3223includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3224memory layout:
3225@smallexample
3226INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3227
3228SECTIONS
3229 @{
3230 .text :
3231 @{
3232 *(.text)
3233 @} > REGION_TEXT
3234 .rodata :
3235 @{
3236 *(.rodata)
3237 rodata_end = .;
3238 @} > REGION_RODATA
3239 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3240 @{
3241 data_start = .;
3242 *(.data)
3243 @} > REGION_DATA
3244 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3245 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3246 .bss :
3247 @{
3248 *(.bss)
3249 @} > REGION_BSS
3250 @}
3251@end smallexample
3252
3253Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3254regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3255variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3256@table @code
3257@item A
3258Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3259@smallexample
3260MEMORY
3261 @{
3262 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3263 @}
3264
3265REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3266REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3267REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3268REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3269@end smallexample
3270@item B
3271Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3272into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3273@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3274@smallexample
3275MEMORY
3276 @{
3277 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3278 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3279 @}
3280
3281REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3282REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3283REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3284REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3285@end smallexample
3286@item C
3287Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3288@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3289initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3290system start into the @code{RAM}.
3291@smallexample
3292MEMORY
3293 @{
3294 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3295 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3296 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3297 @}
3298
3299REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3300REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3301REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3302REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3303@end smallexample
3304@end table
3305
3306It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3307@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3308necessary:
3309@smallexample
3310#include <string.h>
3311
3312extern char data_start [];
3313extern char data_size [];
3314extern char data_load_start [];
3315
3316void copy_data(void)
3317@{
3318 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3319 @{
3320 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3321 @}
3322@}
3323@end smallexample
3324
252b5132 3325@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3326@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3327There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3328
3329@table @code
3330@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3331@kindex ASSERT
3332@cindex assertion in linker script
3333Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3334with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3335
3336@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3337@kindex EXTERN
3338@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3339Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3340symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3341modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3342each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3343command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3344
3345@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3346@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3347@cindex common allocation in linker script
3348This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3349to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3350output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3351
4818e05f
AM
3352@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3353@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3354@cindex common allocation in linker script
3355This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3356command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3357to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3358
53d25da6
AM
3359@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3360@kindex INSERT
3361@cindex insert user script into default script
3362This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3363augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3364inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3365@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3366default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3367sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3368linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3369insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3370linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3371default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3372of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3373to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3374is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3375
3376@smallexample
3377SECTIONS
3378@{
3379 OVERLAY :
3380 @{
3381 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3382 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3383 @}
3384@}
3385INSERT AFTER .text;
3386@end smallexample
3387
252b5132
RH
3388@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3389@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3390@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3391This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3392references among certain output sections.
3393
3394In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3395using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3396will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3397errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3398a function defined in the other section.
3399
3400The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3401@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3402an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3403@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3404names.
3405
3406@ifclear SingleFormat
3407@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3408@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3409@cindex machine architecture
3410@cindex architecture
3411Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3412of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3413architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3414the @samp{-f} option.
3415@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3416
3417@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3418@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3419This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3420@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3421in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3422@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3423@end table
3424
3425@node Assignments
3426@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3427@cindex assignment in scripts
3428@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3429@cindex variables, defining
3430You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3431the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3432
3433@menu
3434* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3435* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3436* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3437* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3438* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3439@end menu
3440
3441@node Simple Assignments
3442@subsection Simple Assignments
3443
3444You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3445
3446@table @code
3447@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3448@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3449@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3450@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3451@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3452@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3453@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3454@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3455@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3456@end table
3457
3458The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3459@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3460defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3461
3462The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3463may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3464
3465The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3466
3467Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3468
3469You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3470statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3471section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3472
3473The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3474expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3475
3476Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3477assignments may be used:
3478
3479@smallexample
3480floating_point = 0;
3481SECTIONS
3482@{
3483 .text :
3484 @{
3485 *(.text)
3486 _etext = .;
3487 @}
156e34dd 3488 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3489 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3490@}
3491@end smallexample
3492@noindent
3493In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3494zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3495the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3496defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3497upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3498
eb8476a6
MR
3499@node HIDDEN
3500@subsection HIDDEN
3501@cindex HIDDEN
3502For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3503exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3504
3505Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3506@code{HIDDEN}:
3507
3508@smallexample
3509HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3510SECTIONS
3511@{
3512 .text :
3513 @{
3514 *(.text)
3515 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3516 @}
3517 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3518 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3519@}
3520@end smallexample
3521@noindent
3522In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3523
252b5132
RH
3524@node PROVIDE
3525@subsection PROVIDE
3526@cindex PROVIDE
3527In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3528only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3529the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3530@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3531@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3532@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3533@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3534@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3535
3536Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3537@smallexample
3538SECTIONS
3539@{
3540 .text :
3541 @{
3542 *(.text)
3543 _etext = .;
3544 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3545 @}
3546@}
3547@end smallexample
3548
3549In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3550underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3551the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3552underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3553If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3554linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3555
7af8e998
L
3556@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3557@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3558@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3559Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3560hidden and won't be exported.
3561
73ae6183
NC
3562@node Source Code Reference
3563@subsection Source Code Reference
3564
3565Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3566intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3567a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3568symbol that does not have a value.
3569
3570Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3571transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3572stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3573prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3574mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3575of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3576variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3577linker script variable might be referred to as:
3578
3579@smallexample
3580 extern int foo;
3581@end smallexample
3582
3583But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3584
3585@smallexample
3586 _foo = 1000;
3587@end smallexample
3588
3589In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3590transformation has taken place.
3591
3592When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3593things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3594in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3595second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3596table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3597contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3598value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3599
3600@smallexample
3601 int foo = 1000;
3602@end smallexample
3603
3604creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3605holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3606number 1000 is initially stored.
3607
3608When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3609first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3610memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3611So:
3612
3613@smallexample
3614 foo = 1;
3615@end smallexample
3616
3617looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3618associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3619address. Whereas:
3620
3621@smallexample
3622 int * a = & foo;
3623@end smallexample
3624
3625looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3626and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3627the variable @samp{a}.
3628
3629Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3630the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3631an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3632
3633@smallexample
3634 foo = 1000;
3635@end smallexample
3636
3637creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3638the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3639address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3640linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3641access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3642
3643Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3644you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3645use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3646section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3647linker script contains these declarations:
3648
3649@smallexample
3650@group
3651 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3652 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3653 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3654@end group
3655@end smallexample
3656
3657Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3658
3659@smallexample
3660@group
3661 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3662
73ae6183
NC
3663 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3664@end group
3665@end smallexample
3666
3667Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3668
252b5132 3669@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3670@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3671@kindex SECTIONS
3672The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3673into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3674
3675The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3676@smallexample
3677SECTIONS
3678@{
3679 @var{sections-command}
3680 @var{sections-command}
3681 @dots{}
3682@}
3683@end smallexample
3684
3685Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3686
3687@itemize @bullet
3688@item
3689an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3690@item
3691a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3692@item
3693an output section description
3694@item
3695an overlay description
3696@end itemize
3697
3698The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3699@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3700those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3701understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3702the layout of the output file.
3703
3704Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3705below.
3706
3707If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3708linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3709section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3710input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3711example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3712in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3713
3714@menu
3715* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3716* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3717* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3718* Input Section:: Input section description
3719* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3720* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3721* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3722* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3723* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3724@end menu
3725
3726@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3727@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3728The full description of an output section looks like this:
3729@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3730@group
7e7d5768 3731@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3732 [AT(@var{lma})]
3733 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3734 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3735 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3736 @{
3737 @var{output-section-command}
3738 @var{output-section-command}
3739 @dots{}
562d3460 3740 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3741@end group
3742@end smallexample
3743
3744Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3745
3746The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3747name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3748The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3749
3750Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3751
3752@itemize @bullet
3753@item
3754a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3755@item
3756an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3757@item
3758data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3759@item
3760a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3761@end itemize
3762
3763@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3764@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3765@cindex name, section
3766@cindex section name
3767The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3768meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3769support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3770must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3771example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3772output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3773names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3774quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3775characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3776commas must be quoted.
3777
3778The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3779Discarding}.
3780
3781@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3782@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3783@cindex address, section
3784@cindex section address
3785The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3786address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3787is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3788
3789If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3790section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3791to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3792alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3793contained within the output section.
3794
3795The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3796
3797@itemize @bullet
3798@item
3799If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3800is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3801in that region.
3802
3803@item
3804If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3805regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3806section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3807be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3808
3809@item
3810If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3811the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3812counter.
3813@end itemize
3814
3815@noindent
3816For example:
3817
252b5132
RH
3818@smallexample
3819.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3820@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3821
252b5132
RH
3822@noindent
3823and
ea5cae92 3824
252b5132
RH
3825@smallexample
3826.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3827@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3828
252b5132
RH
3829@noindent
3830are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3831@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3832counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3833counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3834input sections.
252b5132
RH
3835
3836The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3837For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3838so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3839do something like this:
3840@smallexample
3841.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3842@end smallexample
3843@noindent
3844This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3845aligned upward to the specified value.
3846
3847Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3848location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3849sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3850
3851@node Input Section
36f63dca 3852@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3853@cindex input sections
3854@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3855The most common output section command is an input section description.
3856
3857The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3858You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3859in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3860map the input files into your memory layout.
3861
3862@menu
3863* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3864* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3865* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3866* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3867* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3868@end menu
3869
3870@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3871@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3872@cindex input section basics
3873An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3874by a list of section names in parentheses.
3875
3876The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3877describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3878
3879The most common input section description is to include all input
3880sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3881include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3882@smallexample
3883*(.text)
3884@end smallexample
3885@noindent
18625d54
CM
3886Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3887of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3888match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3889example:
252b5132 3890@smallexample
b4346c09 3891*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3892@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3893will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3894@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3895
3896There are two ways to include more than one section:
3897@smallexample
3898*(.text .rdata)
3899*(.text) *(.rdata)
3900@end smallexample
3901@noindent
3902The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3903@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3904first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3905they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3906@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3907@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3908
3909You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3910You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3911needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3912@smallexample
3913data.o(.data)
3914@end smallexample
3915
ae17ab41
CM
3916To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3917of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3918
3919Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3920
3921@smallexample
3922@group
3923SECTIONS @{
3924 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3925 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3926@}
3927@end group
3928@end smallexample
3929
3930In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3931input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3932@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3933@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3934whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3935
967928e9
AM
3936You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3937matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3938with no whitespace around the colon.
3939
3940@table @samp
3941@item archive:file
3942matches file within archive
3943@item archive:
3944matches the whole archive
3945@item :file
3946matches file but not one in an archive
3947@end table
3948
3949Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3950wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3951single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3952@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3953within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3954also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3955other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3956from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3957command.
3958
252b5132
RH
3959If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3960the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3961commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3962@smallexample
3963data.o
3964@end smallexample
3965
967928e9
AM
3966When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3967and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3968characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3969name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3970did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3971though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3972@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3973the archive search path.
3974
3975@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3976@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3977@cindex input section wildcards
3978@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3979@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3980@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3981In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3982name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3983
3984The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3985pattern for the file name.
3986
3987The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3988
3989@table @samp
3990@item *
3991matches any number of characters
3992@item ?
3993matches any single character
3994@item [@var{chars}]
3995matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3996character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3997@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3998@item \
3999quotes the following character
4000@end table
4001
4002When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4003will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4004Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4005exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4006@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4007a @samp{/} character.
4008
4009File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4010specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4011does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4012
4013If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4014appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4015will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4016sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4017@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4018@smallexample
4019.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4020.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4021@end smallexample
4022
bcaa7b3e 4023@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4024Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4025in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4026this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4027pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4028@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4029into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4030
bcaa7b3e
L
4031@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4032@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4033difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4034ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4035
02ecc8e9
L
4036@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4037@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4038difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4039ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4040encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4041
bcaa7b3e
L
4042@cindex SORT
4043@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4044
4045When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4046can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4047
4048@enumerate
4049@item
4050@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4051It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4052sections have the same name.
4053@item
4054@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4055It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4056sections have the same alignment.
4057@item
c0065db7 4058@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4059treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4060@item
4061@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4062is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4063@item
4064All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4065@end enumerate
4066
4067When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4068section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4069takes precedence over the command line option.
4070
4071If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4072command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4073treated as nested sorting command.
4074
4075@enumerate
4076@item
4077@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4078@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4079@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4080@item
4081@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4082@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4083@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4084@end enumerate
4085
4086If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4087command line option will be ignored.
4088
eda680f8
L
4089@cindex SORT_NONE
4090@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4091section sorting option.
4092
252b5132
RH
4093If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4094@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4095precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4096
4097This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4098files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4099sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4100The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4101with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4102linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4103@smallexample
4104@group
4105SECTIONS @{
4106 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4107 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4108 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4109 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4110@}
4111@end group
4112@end smallexample
4113
4114@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4115@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4116@cindex common symbol placement
4117@cindex uninitialized data placement
4118A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4119file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4120linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4121named @samp{COMMON}.
4122
4123You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4124other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4125particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4126input files are placed in another section.
4127
4128In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4129@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4130@smallexample
4131.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4132@end smallexample
4133
4134@cindex scommon section
4135@cindex small common symbols
4136Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4137example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4138symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4139different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4140the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4141symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4142to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4143locations.
4144
4145@cindex [COMMON]
4146You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4147notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4148@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4149
4150@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4151@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4152@cindex KEEP
4153@cindex garbage collection
4154When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4155it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4156This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4157with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4158@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4159
4160@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4161@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4162The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4163to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4164start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4165@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4166follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4167@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4168@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4169All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4170files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4171
4172@smallexample
4173@group
4174SECTIONS @{
4175 outputa 0x10000 :
4176 @{
4177 all.o
4178 foo.o (.input1)
4179 @}
36f63dca
NC
4180@end group
4181@group
252b5132
RH
4182 outputb :
4183 @{
4184 foo.o (.input2)
4185 foo1.o (.input1)
4186 @}
36f63dca
NC
4187@end group
4188@group
252b5132
RH
4189 outputc :
4190 @{
4191 *(.input1)
4192 *(.input2)
4193 @}
4194@}
4195@end group
a1ab1d2a 4196@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4197
4198@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4199@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4200@cindex data
4201@cindex section data
4202@cindex output section data
4203@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4204@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4205@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4206@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4207@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4208You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4209@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4210an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4211parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4212value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4213counter.
4214
4215The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4216store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4217bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4218stored.
4219
4220For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4221of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4222@smallexample
4223BYTE(1)
4224LONG(addr)
4225@end smallexample
4226
4227When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4228same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4229target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4230@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4231@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4232
4233If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4234which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4235When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4236true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4237endianness of the first input object file.
4238
36f63dca 4239Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4240between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4241@smallexample
4242SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4243@end smallexample
4244whereas this will work:
4245@smallexample
4246SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4247@end smallexample
4248
252b5132
RH
4249@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4250@cindex holes, filling
4251@cindex unspecified memory
4252You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4253current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4254otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4255gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4256with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4257necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4258point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4259than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4260different parts of an output section.
4261
4262This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4263value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4264@smallexample
563e308f 4265FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4266@end smallexample
4267
4268The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4269section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4270part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4271entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4272precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4273expression.
252b5132
RH
4274
4275@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4276@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4277There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4278commands.
4279
4280@table @code
4281@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4282@cindex input filename symbols
4283@cindex filename symbols
4284@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4285The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4286The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4287file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4288the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4289
4290This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4291normally used for any other object file format.
4292
4293@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4294@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4295@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4296@item CONSTRUCTORS
4297When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4298unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4299destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4300arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4301automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4302For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4303linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4304@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4305ignored for other object file formats.
4306
4307The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4308constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4309Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4310the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4311first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4312of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4313compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4314formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4315@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4316the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4317destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4318@code{exit}.
4319
4320For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4321arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4322addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4323and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4324linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4325runtime code expects to see.
4326
4327@smallexample
4328 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4329 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4330 *(.ctors)
4331 LONG(0)
4332 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4333 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4334 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4335 *(.dtors)
4336 LONG(0)
4337 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4338@end smallexample
4339
4340If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4341which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4342are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4343are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4344command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4345@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4346@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4347@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4348
4349Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4350and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4351need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4352scripts.
4353
4354@end table
4355
4356@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4357@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4358@cindex discarding sections
4359@cindex sections, discarding
4360@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4361The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4362for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4363be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4364@smallexample
49c13adb 4365.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4366@end smallexample
4367@noindent
4368will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4369@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4370sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4371space in an output section will also create the output section.
4372
a0976ea4 4373The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4374on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4375symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4376the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4377section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4378
4379@cindex /DISCARD/
4380The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4381input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4382section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4383
4384@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4385@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4386@cindex output section attributes
4387We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4388like this:
0c71d759 4389
252b5132 4390@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4391@group
7e7d5768 4392@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4393 [AT(@var{lma})]
4394 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4395 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4396 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4397 @{
4398 @var{output-section-command}
4399 @var{output-section-command}
4400 @dots{}
562d3460 4401 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4402@end group
4403@end smallexample
0c71d759 4404
252b5132
RH
4405We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4406@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4407remaining section attributes.
4408
a1ab1d2a 4409@menu
252b5132
RH
4410* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4411* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4412* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4413* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4414* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4415* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4416* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4417* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4418@end menu
4419
4420@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4421@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4422Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4423parentheses. The following types are defined:
4424
4425@table @code
4426@item NOLOAD
4427The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4428loaded into memory when the program is run.
4429@item DSECT
4430@itemx COPY
4431@itemx INFO
4432@itemx OVERLAY
4433These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4434rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4435marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4436section when the program is run.
4437@end table
4438
4439@kindex NOLOAD
4440@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4441@cindex loading, preventing
4442The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4443the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4444the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4445@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4446need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4447@smallexample
4448@group
4449SECTIONS @{
4450 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4451 @dots{}
4452@}
4453@end group
4454@end smallexample
4455
4456@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4457@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4458@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4459@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4460@cindex load address
4461@cindex section load address
4462Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4463@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4464@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4465specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4466address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4467
ea5cae92
NC
4468The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4469specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4470takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4471load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4472region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4473
4474If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4475section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4476load address:
4477
4478@itemize @bullet
4479@item
4480If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4481the LMA address as well.
4482
4483@item
4484If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4485
4486@item
4487Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4488with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4489section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4490VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4491the last section in the located region.
4492
4493@item
4494If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4495that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4496
4497@item
4498If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4499section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4500@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4501
4502@cindex ROM initialized data
4503@cindex initialized data in ROM
4504This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4505example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4506called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4507@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4508even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4509uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4510defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4511counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4512
4513@smallexample
4514@group
4515SECTIONS
4516 @{
4517 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4518 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4519 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4520 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4521 .bss 0x3000 :
4522 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4523@}
4524@end group
4525@end smallexample
4526
4527The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4528this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4529the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4530how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4531script.
4532
4533@smallexample
4534@group
4535extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4536char *src = &_etext;
4537char *dst = &_data;
4538
ea5cae92
NC
4539/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4540while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4541 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4542
ea5cae92 4543/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4544for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4545 *dst = 0;
4546@end group
4547@end smallexample
4548
bbf115d3
L
4549@node Forced Output Alignment
4550@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4551@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4552@cindex forcing output section alignment
4553@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4554You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4555
7e7d5768
AM
4556@node Forced Input Alignment
4557@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4558@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4559@cindex forcing input section alignment
4560@cindex input section alignment
4561You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4562SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4563sections, whether larger or smaller.
4564
0c71d759
NC
4565@node Output Section Constraint
4566@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4567@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4568@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4569@cindex constraints on output sections
4570You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4571of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4572read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4573@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4574
252b5132 4575@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4576@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4577@kindex >@var{region}
4578@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4579@cindex memory regions and sections
4580You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4581using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4582
4583Here is a simple example:
4584@smallexample
4585@group
4586MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4587SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4588@end group
4589@end smallexample
4590
4591@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4592@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4593@kindex :@var{phdr}
4594@cindex section, assigning to program header
4595@cindex program headers and sections
4596You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4597using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4598one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4599assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4600@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4601linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4602
4603Here is a simple example:
4604@smallexample
4605@group
4606PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4607SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4608@end group
4609@end smallexample
4610
4611@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4612@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4613@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4614@cindex section fill pattern
4615@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4616You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4617@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4618(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4619within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4620alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4621necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4622of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4623an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4624fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4625other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4626pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4627expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4628
4629You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4630output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4631
4632Here is a simple example:
4633@smallexample
4634@group
563e308f 4635SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4636@end group
4637@end smallexample
4638
4639@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4640@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4641@kindex OVERLAY
4642@cindex overlays
4643An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4644are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4645the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4646copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4647required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4648can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4649than another.
4650
4651Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4652@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4653output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4654command is as follows:
4655@smallexample
4656@group
4657OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4658 @{
4659 @var{secname1}
4660 @{
4661 @var{output-section-command}
4662 @var{output-section-command}
4663 @dots{}
4664 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4665 @var{secname2}
4666 @{
4667 @var{output-section-command}
4668 @var{output-section-command}
4669 @dots{}
4670 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4671 @dots{}
4672 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4673@end group
4674@end smallexample
4675
4676Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4677section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4678section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4679those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4680except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4681sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4682
4683The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4684addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4685memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4686whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4687and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4688and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4689
56dd11f0
NC
4690If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4691references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4692the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4693sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4694@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4695
4696For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4697provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4698defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4699@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4700the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4701within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4702symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4703
4704At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4705the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4706
4707Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4708@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4709@smallexample
4710@group
4711 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4712 @{
4713 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4714 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4715 @}
4716@end group
4717@end smallexample
4718@noindent
4719This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4720address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4721@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4722following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4723@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4724@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4725
4726C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4727like the following.
4728
4729@smallexample
4730@group
4731 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4732 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4733 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4734@end group
4735@end smallexample
4736
4737Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4738everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4739example could have been written identically as follows.
4740
4741@smallexample
4742@group
4743 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4744 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4745 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4746 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4747 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4748 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4749 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4750@end group
4751@end smallexample
4752
4753@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4754@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4755@kindex MEMORY
4756@cindex memory regions
4757@cindex regions of memory
4758@cindex allocating memory
4759@cindex discontinuous memory
4760The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4761memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4762
4763The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4764memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4765may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4766can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4767set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4768regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4769around to fit into the available regions.
4770
4771A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4772command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4773you wish. The syntax is:
4774@smallexample
4775@group
a1ab1d2a 4776MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4777 @{
4778 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4779 @dots{}
4780 @}
4781@end group
4782@end smallexample
4783
4784The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4785region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4786Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4787with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4788must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4789add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4790command.
252b5132
RH
4791
4792@cindex memory region attributes
4793The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4794whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4795not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4796@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4797section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4798the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4799them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4800
4801The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4802@table @samp
4803@item R
4804Read-only section
4805@item W
4806Read/write section
4807@item X
4808Executable section
4809@item A
4810Allocatable section
4811@item I
4812Initialized section
4813@item L
4814Same as @samp{I}
4815@item !
c09e9a8c 4816Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4817@end table
4818
4819If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4820@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4821attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4822in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4823attributes.
4824
4825@kindex ORIGIN =
4826@kindex o =
4827@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4828The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4829the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4830cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4831abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4832@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4833
4834@kindex LENGTH =
4835@kindex len =
4836@kindex l =
4837The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4838region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4839be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4840@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4841
4842In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4843available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4844and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4845linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4846is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4847or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4848explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4849region.
4850
4851@smallexample
4852@group
a1ab1d2a 4853MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4854 @{
4855 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4856 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4857 @}
4858@end group
4859@end smallexample
4860
4861Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4862specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4863@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4864a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4865output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4866was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4867the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4868output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4869region, the linker will issue an error message.
4870
3ec57632 4871It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4872expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4873@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4874
4875@smallexample
4876@group
c0065db7 4877 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4878@end group
4879@end smallexample
4880
252b5132
RH
4881@node PHDRS
4882@section PHDRS Command
4883@kindex PHDRS
4884@cindex program headers
4885@cindex ELF program headers
4886@cindex program segments
4887@cindex segments, ELF
4888The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4889@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4890loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4891program with the @samp{-p} option.
4892
4893When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4894reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4895program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4896This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4897interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4898
4899The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4900in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4901precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4902the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4903not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4904
4905The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4906generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4907ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4908
4909This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4910@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4911
4912@smallexample
4913@group
4914PHDRS
4915@{
4916 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4917 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4918@}
4919@end group
4920@end smallexample
4921
4922The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4923of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4924header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4925with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4926must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4927is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4928
4929Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4930system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4931specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4932sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4933attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4934Section Phdr}.
4935
4936It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4937merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4938repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4939contain the section.
4940
4941If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4942then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4943not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4944convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4945placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4946default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4947segment at all.
4948
4949@kindex FILEHDR
4950@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4951You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4952the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4953The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4954file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4955include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4956segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4957these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4958
4959The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4960value of the keyword.
4961
4962@table @asis
4963@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4964Indicates an unused program header.
4965
4966@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4967Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4968the file.
4969
4970@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4971Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4972
4973@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4974Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4975found.
4976
4977@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4978Indicates a segment holding note information.
4979
4980@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4981A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4982ABI.
4983
4984@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4985Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4986
4987@item @var{expression}
4988An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4989be used for types not defined above.
4990@end table
4991
4992You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4993in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4994@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4995Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4996output section attribute.
4997
4998The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4999which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5000explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5001an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5002header.
5003
5004Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5005headers used on a native ELF system.
5006
5007@example
5008@group
5009PHDRS
5010@{
5011 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5012 interp PT_INTERP ;
5013 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5014 data PT_LOAD ;
5015 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5016@}
5017
5018SECTIONS
5019@{
5020 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5021 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5022 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5023 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5024 @dots{}
5025 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5026 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5027 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5028 @dots{}
5029@}
5030@end group
5031@end example
5032
5033@node VERSION
5034@section VERSION Command
5035@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5036@cindex symbol versions
5037@cindex version script
5038@cindex versions of symbols
5039The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5040only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5041symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5042a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5043shared library.
5044
5045You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5046you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5047also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5048
5049The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5050@smallexample
5051VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5052@end smallexample
5053
5054The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5055Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5056version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5057version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5058version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5059scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5060library.
5061
5062The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5063examples.
5064
5065@smallexample
5066VERS_1.1 @{
5067 global:
5068 foo1;
5069 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5070 old*;
5071 original*;
5072 new*;
252b5132
RH
5073@};
5074
5075VERS_1.2 @{
5076 foo2;
5077@} VERS_1.1;
5078
5079VERS_2.0 @{
5080 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5081 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5082 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5083 "f(int, double)";
5084 @};
252b5132
RH
5085@} VERS_1.2;
5086@end smallexample
5087
5088This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5089version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5090The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5091a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5092of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5093symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5094is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5095in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5096However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5097name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5098
5099Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5100depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5101to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5102
5103Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5104depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5105and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5106
5107When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5108specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5109unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5110unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5111somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5112wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5113wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5114set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5115ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5116
5117The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5118they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5119could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5120However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5121
0f6bf451 5122Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5123in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5124symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5125won't.
5126
5127@smallexample
7c9c73be 5128@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5129@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5130
252b5132
RH
5131When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5132symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5133requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5134shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5135loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5136linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5137application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5138way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5139all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5140search for each symbol reference.
5141
5142The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5143doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5144that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5145functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5146the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5147required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5148that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5149versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5150the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5151
5152There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5153first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5154source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5155script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5156maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5157@smallexample
5158__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5159@end smallexample
5160@noindent
5161in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5162be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5163The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5164@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5165takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5166
5167The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5168function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5169an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5170version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5171linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5172
5173To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5174source file. Here is an example:
5175
5176@smallexample
5177__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5178__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5179__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5180__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5181@end smallexample
5182
5183In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5184unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5185example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5186@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5187
5188When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5189some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5190this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5191@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5192declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5193you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5194
5195If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5196within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5197(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5198specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5199
cb840a31
L
5200You can also specify the language in the version script:
5201
5202@smallexample
5203VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5204@end smallexample
5205
c0065db7 5206The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5207The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5208demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5209patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5210@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5211
86043bbb
MM
5212Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5213described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5214or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5215the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5216whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5217cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5218might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5219should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5220expect when you upgrade.
5221
252b5132
RH
5222@node Expressions
5223@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5224@cindex expressions
5225@cindex arithmetic
5226The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5227that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5228expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5229host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5230
5231You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5232
5233The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5234expressions.
5235
5236@menu
5237* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5238* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5239* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5240* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5241* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5242* Operators:: Operators
5243* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5244* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5245* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5246@end menu
5247
5248@node Constants
5249@subsection Constants
5250@cindex integer notation
5251@cindex constants in linker scripts
5252All constants are integers.
5253
5254As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5255octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5256hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5257@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5258@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5259value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5260
5261@cindex scaled integers
5262@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5263@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5264@cindex suffixes for integers
5265@cindex integer suffixes
5266In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5267constant by
5268@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5269@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5270@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5271@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5272@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5273@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5274@tex
5275${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5276@end tex
5277@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5278respectively. For example, the following
5279all refer to the same quantity:
5280
252b5132 5281@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5282_fourk_1 = 4K;
5283_fourk_2 = 4096;
5284_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5285_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5286@end smallexample
5287
8a308ae8
NC
5288Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5289conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5290
0c71d759
NC
5291@node Symbolic Constants
5292@subsection Symbolic Constants
5293@cindex symbolic constants
5294@kindex CONSTANT
5295It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5296the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5297
5298@table @code
5299@item MAXPAGESIZE
5300@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5301The target's maximum page size.
5302
5303@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5304@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5305The target's default page size.
5306@end table
5307
5308So for example:
5309
5310@smallexample
9d5777a3 5311 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5312@end smallexample
5313
5314will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5315supported by the target.
5316
252b5132
RH
5317@node Symbols
5318@subsection Symbol Names
5319@cindex symbol names
5320@cindex names
5321@cindex quoted symbol names
5322@kindex "
5323Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5324and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5325Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5326specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5327keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5328@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5329"SECTION" = 9;
5330"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5331@end smallexample
5332
5333Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5334to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5335whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5336
ecca9871
L
5337@node Orphan Sections
5338@subsection Orphan Sections
5339@cindex orphan
5340Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5341are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5342script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5343output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5344placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5345attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5346same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5347If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5348at the end of the file.
5349
5350For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5351well as section flag.
5352
41911f68 5353If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5354the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5355__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5356section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5357orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5358representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5359character.
5360
252b5132
RH
5361@node Location Counter
5362@subsection The Location Counter
5363@kindex .
5364@cindex dot
5365@cindex location counter
5366@cindex current output location
5367The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5368current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5369location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5370within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5371anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5372
5373@cindex holes
5374Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5375moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5376location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5377and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5378doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5379
5380@smallexample
5381SECTIONS
5382@{
5383 output :
5384 @{
5385 file1(.text)
5386 . = . + 1000;
5387 file2(.text)
5388 . += 1000;
5389 file3(.text)
563e308f 5390 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5391@}
5392@end smallexample
5393@noindent
5394In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5395located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5396followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5397@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5398@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5399specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5400
5c6bbab8
NC
5401@cindex dot inside sections
5402Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5403current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5404statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5405absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5406however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5407not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5408
5409@smallexample
5410SECTIONS
5411@{
5412 . = 0x100
5413 .text: @{
5414 *(.text)
5415 . = 0x200
5416 @}
5417 . = 0x500
5418 .data: @{
5419 *(.data)
5420 . += 0x600
5421 @}
5422@}
5423@end smallexample
5424
5425The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5426and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5427the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5428much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5429move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5430and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5431the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5432the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5433
b5666f2f
AM
5434@cindex dot outside sections
5435Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5436output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5437needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5438
5439@smallexample
5440SECTIONS
5441@{
5442 start_of_text = . ;
5443 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5444 end_of_text = . ;
5445
5446 start_of_data = . ;
5447 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5448 end_of_data = . ;
5449@}
5450@end smallexample
5451
5452If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5453not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5454between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5455should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5456blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5457the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5458sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5459statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5460special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5461place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5462as follows:
5463
5464@smallexample
5465SECTIONS
5466@{
5467 start_of_text = . ;
5468 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5469 end_of_text = . ;
5470
5471 start_of_data = . ;
5472 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5473 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5474 end_of_data = . ;
5475@}
5476@end smallexample
5477
5478This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5479@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5480placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5481assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5482a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5483section. So you could write:
5484
5485@smallexample
5486SECTIONS
5487@{
5488 start_of_text = . ;
5489 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5490 end_of_text = . ;
5491
5492 . = . ;
5493 start_of_data = . ;
5494 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5495 end_of_data = . ;
5496@}
5497@end smallexample
5498
5499Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5500@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5501
252b5132
RH
5502@need 2000
5503@node Operators
5504@subsection Operators
5505@cindex operators for arithmetic
5506@cindex arithmetic operators
5507@cindex precedence in expressions
5508The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5509the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5510@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5511@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5512@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5513@smallexample
5514precedence associativity Operators Notes
5515(highest)
55161 left ! - ~ (1)
55172 left * / %
55183 left + -
55194 left >> <<
55205 left == != > < <= >=
55216 left &
55227 left |
55238 left &&
55249 left ||
552510 right ? :
552611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5527(lowest)
5528@end smallexample
5529Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5530(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5531(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5532@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5533@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5534@tex
5535\vskip \baselineskip
5536%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5537\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5538\hrule
5539\halign
5540{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5541height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5542&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5543height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5544\noalign{\hrule}
5545height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5546&highest&&&&&\cr
5547% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5548&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5549&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5550&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5551&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5552&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5553&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5554&7&&left&&|&\cr
5555&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5556&9&&left&&||&\cr
5557&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5558&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5559&lowest&&&&&\cr
5560height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5561\hrule}
5562@end tex
5563@iftex
5564{
5565@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5566@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5567@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5568}
5569@end iftex
5570@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5571
5572@node Evaluation
5573@subsection Evaluation
5574@cindex lazy evaluation
5575@cindex expression evaluation order
5576The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5577an expression when absolutely necessary.
5578
5579The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5580address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5581regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5582as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5583
5584However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5585until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5586other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5587for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5588
5589The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5590assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5591allocation.
5592
5593Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5594@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5595
5596If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5597available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5598following
5599@smallexample
5600@group
5601SECTIONS
5602 @{
a1ab1d2a 5603 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5604 @{ *(.text) @}
5605 @}
5606@end group
5607@end smallexample
5608@noindent
5609will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5610address}.
5611
5612@node Expression Section
5613@subsection The Section of an Expression
5614@cindex expression sections
5615@cindex absolute expressions
5616@cindex relative expressions
5617@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5618@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5619@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5620Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5621relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5622using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5623value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5624symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5625operations.
5626
abf4be64
AM
5627Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5628section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5629address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5630@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5631functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5632One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5633(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5634differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5635versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5636section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5637Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5638absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5639given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5640everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5641
5642In the following simple example,
252b5132 5643
7542af2a
AM
5644@smallexample
5645@group
5646SECTIONS
5647 @{
5648 . = 0x100;
5649 __executable_start = 0x100;
5650 .data :
5651 @{
5652 . = 0x10;
5653 __data_start = 0x10;
5654 *(.data)
5655 @}
5656 @dots{}
5657 @}
5658@end group
5659@end smallexample
252b5132 5660
7542af2a
AM
5661both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5662address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5663@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5664section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5665
5c3049d2
AM
5666For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5667addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5668
5669@itemize @bullet
5670@item
c05f749e
AM
5671Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5672operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5673absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5674@item
7542af2a
AM
5675Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5676relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5677and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5678@item
c05f749e
AM
5679Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5680in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5681address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5682before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5683@end itemize
5684
5685The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5686
5687@itemize @bullet
5688@item
5689An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5690@item
5691The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5692@item
9bc8bb33 5693The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5694relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5695(after above conversions) is also a number.
5696@item
5697The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5698relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5699section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5700@item
5701The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5702conversions) is an absolute address.
5703@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5704
5705You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5706to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5707create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5708section @samp{.data}:
5709@smallexample
5710SECTIONS
5711 @{
5712 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5713 @}
5714@end smallexample
5715@noindent
5716If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5717@samp{.data} section.
5718
7542af2a
AM
5719Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5720particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5721
252b5132
RH
5722@node Builtin Functions
5723@subsection Builtin Functions
5724@cindex functions in expressions
5725The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5726use in linker script expressions.
5727
5728@table @code
5729@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5730@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5731@cindex expression, absolute
5732Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5733of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5734value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5735normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5736
5737@item ADDR(@var{section})
5738@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5739@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5740Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5741script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5742the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5743@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5744@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5745the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5746@smallexample
5747@group
5748SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5749 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5750 @{
252b5132
RH
5751 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5752 @dots{}
5753 @}
5754 .output :
5755 @{
5756 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5757 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5758 @}
5759@dots{} @}
5760@end group
5761@end smallexample
5762
876f4090
NS
5763@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5764@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5765@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5766@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5767@cindex round up location counter
5768@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5769@cindex round up expression
5770@cindex align expression
5771Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5772to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5773doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5774arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5775expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5776equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5777
5778Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5779next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5780variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5781input sections:
252b5132
RH
5782@smallexample
5783@group
5784SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5785 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5786 *(.data)
5787 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5788 @}
5789@dots{} @}
5790@end group
5791@end smallexample
5792@noindent
5793The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5794a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5795a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5796of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5797
5798The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5799
362c1d1a
NS
5800@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5801@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5802@cindex section alignment
5803Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5804been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5805evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5806the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5807value in that section.
5808@smallexample
5809@group
5810SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5811 .output @{
5812 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5813 @dots{}
5814 @}
5815@dots{} @}
5816@end group
5817@end smallexample
5818
252b5132
RH
5819@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5820@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5821This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5822scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5823section.
5824
2d20f7bf
JJ
5825@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5826@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5827This is equivalent to either
5828@smallexample
5829(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5830@end smallexample
5831or
5832@smallexample
5833(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5834@end smallexample
5835@noindent
5836depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5837for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5838@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5839If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5840memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5841bytes in the on-disk file.
5842
5843This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5844any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5845@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5846be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5847working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5848
5849@noindent
5850Example:
5851@smallexample
5852 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5853@end smallexample
5854
5855@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5856@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5857This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5858evaluation purposes.
5859
5860@smallexample
5861 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5862@end smallexample
5863
a4f5ad88
JJ
5864@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5865@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5866This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5867@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5868When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5869does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5870@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5871boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5872it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5873@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5874
5875@smallexample
5876 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5877@end smallexample
5878
252b5132
RH
5879@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5880@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5881@cindex symbol defaults
5882Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5883defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5884return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5885default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5886shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5887the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5888existed, its value is preserved:
5889
5890@smallexample
5891@group
5892SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5893 .text : @{
5894 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5895 @dots{}
5896 @}
5897 @dots{}
5898@}
5899@end group
5900@end smallexample
5901
3ec57632
NC
5902@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5903@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5904Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5905
252b5132
RH
5906@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5907@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5908@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5909Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5910Section LMA}).
5911
5912@kindex MAX
5913@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5914Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5915
5916@kindex MIN
5917@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5918Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5919
5920@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5921@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5922@cindex unallocated address, next
5923Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5924This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5925use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5926output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5927
3ec57632
NC
5928@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5929@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5930Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5931
ba916c8a
MM
5932@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5933@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5934Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5935value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5936option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5937@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5938be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5939``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5940name.
5941
252b5132
RH
5942@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5943@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5944@cindex section size
5945Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5946been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5947evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5948@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5949@smallexample
5950@group
5951SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5952 .output @{
5953 .start = . ;
5954 @dots{}
5955 .end = . ;
5956 @}
5957 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5958 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5959@dots{} @}
5960@end group
5961@end smallexample
5962
5963@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5964@itemx sizeof_headers
5965@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5966@cindex header size
5967Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5968information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5969this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5970choose, to facilitate paging.
5971
5972@cindex not enough room for program headers
5973@cindex program headers, not enough room
5974When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5975@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5976number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5977addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5978additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5979room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5980the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5981script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5982you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5983command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5984@end table
5985
5986@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5987@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5988@cindex implicit linker scripts
5989If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5990an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5991linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5992linker will report an error.
5993
5994An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5995
5996Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5997assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5998commands.
5999
6000Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6001at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6002read. This can affect archive searching.
6003
6004@ifset GENERIC
6005@node Machine Dependent
6006@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6007
6008@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6009@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6010sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6011functionality are not listed.
6012
6013@menu
36f63dca
NC
6014@ifset H8300
6015* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6016@end ifset
6017@ifset I960
6018* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6019@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6020@ifset M68HC11
6021* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6022@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6023@ifset ARM
6024* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6025@end ifset
6026@ifset HPPA
6027* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6028@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6029@ifset M68K
6030* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6031@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6032@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6033* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6034@end ifset
2469cfa2 6035@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6036* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6037@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6038@ifset POWERPC
6039* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6040@end ifset
6041@ifset POWERPC64
6042* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6043@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6044@ifset SPU
6045* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6046@end ifset
74459f0e 6047@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6048* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6049@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6050@ifset WIN32
6051* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6052@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6053@ifset XTENSA
6054* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6055@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6056@end menu
6057@end ifset
6058
252b5132
RH
6059@ifset H8300
6060@ifclear GENERIC
6061@raisesections
6062@end ifclear
6063
6064@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6065@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6066
6067@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6068For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6069you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6070
6071@table @emph
6072@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6073@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6074@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6075targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6076program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6077respectively.
6078
6079@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6080@item synthesizing instructions
6081@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6082@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6083sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6084page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6085(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6086@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6087top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6088
6089@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6090@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6091biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6092which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6093page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6094(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6095@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6096the top page of memory).
6097
6098@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6099@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
610032 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6101changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6102(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6103@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6104the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6105@end table
6106
6107@ifclear GENERIC
6108@lowersections
6109@end ifclear
6110@end ifset
6111
36f63dca 6112@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6113@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6114@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6115@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6116@node Renesas
6117@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6118
c2dcd04e
NC
6119@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6120H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6121options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6122@end ifset
6123@end ifclear
6124
6125@ifset I960
6126@ifclear GENERIC
6127@raisesections
6128@end ifclear
6129
6130@node i960
6131@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6132
6133@cindex i960 support
6134
6135You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6136specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6137family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6138incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6139linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6140libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6141search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6142
6143For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6144well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6145paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6146the names
6147
6148@smallexample
6149@group
6150try
6151libtry.a
6152tryca
6153libtryca.a
6154@end group
6155@end smallexample
6156
6157@noindent
6158The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6159two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6160
6161You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6162the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6163use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6164specifies a library.
6165
6166@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6167@cindex relaxing on i960
6168@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6169you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6170@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6171them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6172instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6173instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6174target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6175not itself call any subroutines).
6176
48229727
JB
6177@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6178@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6179@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6180The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6181
6182The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6183
85fdf906
AH
6184@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6185@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6186The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6187
36f63dca
NC
6188@ifclear GENERIC
6189@lowersections
6190@end ifclear
6191@end ifset
6192
6193@ifset ARM
6194@ifclear GENERIC
6195@raisesections
6196@end ifclear
6197
93fd0973
SC
6198@ifset M68HC11
6199@ifclear GENERIC
6200@raisesections
6201@end ifclear
6202
6203@node M68HC11/68HC12
6204@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6205
6206@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6207
6208@subsection Linker Relaxation
6209
6210For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6211optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6212
6213@table @emph
6214@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6215@item relaxing address modes
6216@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6217targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6218program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6219respectively.
6220
6221@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6222transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6223page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6224
6225@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6226When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6227of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6228addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6229@code{bset} instructions.
6230
6231@end table
6232
6233@subsection Trampoline Generation
6234
6235@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6236@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6237For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6238call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6239will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6240trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6241case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6242point to the function trampoline.
6243
6244@ifclear GENERIC
6245@lowersections
6246@end ifclear
6247@end ifset
6248
36f63dca 6249@node ARM
3674e28a 6250@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6251
6252@cindex ARM interworking support
6253@kindex --support-old-code
6254For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6255between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6256been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6257line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6258libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6259option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6260given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6261which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6262the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6263non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6264
6265@cindex thumb entry point
6266@cindex entry point, thumb
6267@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6268The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6269@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6270But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6271branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6272executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6273
ce11ba6c
KT
6274@cindex PE import table prefixing
6275@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6276The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6277the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6278element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6279import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6280
e489d0ae
PB
6281@cindex BE8
6282@kindex --be8
6283The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6284executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6285The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6286
3674e28a
PB
6287@cindex TARGET1
6288@kindex --target1-rel
6289@kindex --target1-abs
6290The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6291@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6292or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6293and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6294
6295@cindex TARGET2
6296@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6297The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6298@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6299meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6300@table @samp
6301@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6302@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6303@item abs
6304@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6305@item got-rel
6306@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6307@end table
6308
319850b4
JB
6309@cindex FIX_V4BX
6310@kindex --fix-v4bx
6311The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6312specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6313interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6314also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6315
6316In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6317linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6318@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6319
6320In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6321relocations are ignored.
6322
845b51d6
PB
6323@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6324@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6325Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6326relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6327
6328@smallexample
6329TST rM, #1
6330MOVEQ PC, rM
6331BX Rn
6332@end smallexample
6333
6334This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6335and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6336condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6337
33bfe774
JB
6338@cindex USE_BLX
6339@kindex --use-blx
6340The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6341BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6342situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6343code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6344each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6345
6346This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6347specify it if you are using that target.
6348
c6dd86c6
JB
6349@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6350@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6351The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6352bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6353instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6354to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6355the support code can read the intended values.
6356
6357The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6358intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6359and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6360intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6361full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6362you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6363
6364If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6365enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6366@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6367mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6368vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6369@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6370
6371If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6372potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6373such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6374first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6375instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6376the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6377are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6378
2de70689
MGD
6379@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6380@kindex --fix-arm1176
6381@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6382The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6383in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6384are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6385unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6386
9d5777a3 6387Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6388Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6389http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6390
bf21ed78
MS
6391@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6392@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6393The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6394warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6395enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6396linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6397using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6398not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6399
6400@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6401@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6402The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6403warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6404@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6405linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6406using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6407
726150b7
NC
6408@cindex PIC_VENEER
6409@kindex --pic-veneer
6410The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6411ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6412is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6413@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6414
6415@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6416@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6417The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6418code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6419perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6420placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6421controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6422The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6423duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6424group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6425code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6426where they should be placed.
6427
6428The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6429@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6430placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6431branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6432placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6433value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6434exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6435A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6436linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6437from the input sections.
6438
6439The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6440@samp{N = +1}.
6441
1a51c1a4
NC
6442Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6443only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6444otherwise.
6445
36f63dca
NC
6446@ifclear GENERIC
6447@lowersections
6448@end ifclear
6449@end ifset
6450
6451@ifset HPPA
6452@ifclear GENERIC
6453@raisesections
6454@end ifclear
6455
6456@node HPPA ELF32
6457@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6458@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6459@kindex --multi-subspace
6460When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6461import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6462The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6463stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6464multiple sub-spaces.
6465
6466@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6467@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6468Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6469stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6470@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6471sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6472a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6473the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6474conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6475prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6476A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6477branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6478@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6479@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6480detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6481positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6482
6483Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6484single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6485create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6486large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6487
6488@ifclear GENERIC
6489@lowersections
6490@end ifclear
6491@end ifset
6492
7fb9f789
NC
6493@ifset M68K
6494@ifclear GENERIC
6495@raisesections
6496@end ifclear
6497
6498@node M68K
6499@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6500
6501@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6502@kindex --got=@var{type}
6503The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6504The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6505@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6506the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6507@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6508entries only at non-negative offsets.
6509@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6510entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6511support such GOTs.
6512@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6513output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6514file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6515files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6516
6517@ifclear GENERIC
6518@lowersections
6519@end ifclear
6520@end ifset
6521
36f63dca
NC
6522@ifset MMIX
6523@ifclear GENERIC
6524@raisesections
6525@end ifclear
6526
6527@node MMIX
6528@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6529For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6530@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6531understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6532can translate between the two formats.
6533
6534There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6535Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6536registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6537equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6538@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6539global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6540this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6541symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6542
7a2de473
HPN
6543Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6544@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6545The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6546of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6547
6548Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6549are left out from an mmo file.
6550
6551@ifclear GENERIC
6552@lowersections
6553@end ifclear
6554@end ifset
6555
6556@ifset MSP430
6557@ifclear GENERIC
6558@raisesections
6559@end ifclear
6560
6561@node MSP430
6562@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6563For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6564will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6565just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6566
6567@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6568The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6569
6570@table @code
6571@item @samp{.vectors}
6572Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6573
6574@item @samp{.bootloader}
6575Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6576in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6577
6578@item @samp{.infomem}
6579Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6580this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6581
c0065db7 6582@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6583This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6584in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6585
6586@item @samp{.noinit}
6587Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6588
c0065db7 6589The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6590@end table
6591
6592@ifclear GENERIC
6593@lowersections
6594@end ifclear
6595@end ifset
6596
2a60a7a8
AM
6597@ifset POWERPC
6598@ifclear GENERIC
6599@raisesections
6600@end ifclear
6601
6602@node PowerPC ELF32
6603@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6604@cindex PowerPC long branches
6605@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6606Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6607displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6608@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6609@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6610the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6611section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6612section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6613@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6614both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6615considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6616
6617@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6618@table @option
6619@cindex PowerPC PLT
6620@kindex --bss-plt
6621@item --bss-plt
6622Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6623generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6624the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6625writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6626@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6627PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6628compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6629BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6630
016687f8
AM
6631@kindex --secure-plt
6632@item --secure-plt
6633@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6634@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6635when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6636layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6637style BSS PLT.
6638
2a60a7a8
AM
6639@cindex PowerPC GOT
6640@kindex --sdata-got
6641@item --sdata-got
6642The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6643sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6644@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6645section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6646@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6647@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6648@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6649@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6650PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6651pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6652GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6653really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6654
6655@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6656@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6657@item --emit-stub-syms
6658This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6659symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6660
6661@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6662@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6663@item --no-tls-optimize
6664PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6665sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6666disable the optimization.
6667@end table
6668
6669@ifclear GENERIC
6670@lowersections
6671@end ifclear
6672@end ifset
6673
6674@ifset POWERPC64
6675@ifclear GENERIC
6676@raisesections
6677@end ifclear
6678
6679@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6680@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6681
6682@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6683@table @option
6684@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6685@kindex --stub-group-size
6686@item --stub-group-size
6687Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6688by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6689@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6690sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6691a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6692the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6693conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6694prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6695A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6696branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6697@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6698@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6699detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6700positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6701
6702Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6703single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6704create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6705large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6706
6707@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6708@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6709@item --emit-stub-syms
6710This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6711symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6712
6713@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6714@kindex --dotsyms
6715@kindex --no-dotsyms
6716@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6717These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6718in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6719function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6720code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6721properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6722to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6723@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6724dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6725feature.
6726
6727@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6728@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6729@item --no-tls-optimize
6730PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6731sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6732disable the optimization.
6733
6734@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6735@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6736@item --no-opd-optimize
6737PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6738corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6739the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6740Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6741
6742@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6743@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6744@item --non-overlapping-opd
6745Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6746@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6747the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6748entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6749
6750@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6751@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6752@item --no-toc-optimize
6753PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6754entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6755reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6756marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6757marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6758relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6759unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6760reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6761discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6762reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6763code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6764optimization.
6765
6766@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6767@kindex --no-multi-toc
6768@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6769If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6770@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6771where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6772entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6773total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6774grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6775TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6776calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6777help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
677864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6779Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6780
6781@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6782@kindex --no-toc-sort
6783@item --no-toc-sort
6784By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6785happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6786placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6787with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6788referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6789@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6790results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6791off this feature.
6792
6793@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6794@kindex --plt-align
6795@kindex --no-plt-align
6796@item --plt-align
6797@itemx --no-plt-align
6798Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6799aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6800boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6801are packed tightly.
6802
6803@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6804@kindex --plt-static-chain
6805@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6806@item --plt-static-chain
6807@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6808Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6809chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6810chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6811
6812@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6813@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6814@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6815@item --plt-thread-safe
6816@itemx --no-thread-safe
6817With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6818lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6819another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6820order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6821memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6822barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6823looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6824seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6825default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6826@end table
6827
6828@ifclear GENERIC
6829@lowersections
6830@end ifclear
6831@end ifset
6832
49fa1e15
AM
6833@ifset SPU
6834@ifclear GENERIC
6835@raisesections
6836@end ifclear
6837
6838@node SPU ELF
6839@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6840
6841@cindex SPU ELF options
6842@table @option
6843
6844@cindex SPU plugins
6845@kindex --plugin
6846@item --plugin
6847This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6848
6849@cindex SPU overlays
6850@kindex --no-overlays
6851@item --no-overlays
6852Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6853regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6854@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6855turns off all this special overlay handling.
6856
6857@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6858@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6859@item --emit-stub-syms
6860This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6861symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6862
6863@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6864@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6865@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6866This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6867function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6868on calls to non-overlay regions.
6869
6870@cindex SPU local store size
6871@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6872@item --local-store=lo:hi
6873@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6874the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6875range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6876
c0065db7 6877@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6878@kindex --stack-analysis
6879@item --stack-analysis
6880SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6881unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6882under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6883@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6884@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6885determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6886for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6887for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6888for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6889find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6890and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6891under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6892dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6893is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6894and calls will be given.
6895
c0065db7 6896@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6897@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6898@item --emit-stack-syms
6899This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6900in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6901These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6902functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6903functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6904such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6905The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6906@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6907@end table
6908
6909@ifclear GENERIC
6910@lowersections
6911@end ifclear
6912@end ifset
6913
36f63dca
NC
6914@ifset TICOFF
6915@ifclear GENERIC
6916@raisesections
6917@end ifclear
6918
6919@node TI COFF
6920@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6921@cindex TI COFF versions
6922@kindex --format=@var{version}
6923The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6924TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6925also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6926format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6927header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6928
6929@ifclear GENERIC
6930@lowersections
6931@end ifclear
6932@end ifset
6933
2ca22b03
NC
6934@ifset WIN32
6935@ifclear GENERIC
6936@raisesections
6937@end ifclear
6938
6939@node WIN32
6940@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6941
c0065db7 6942This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6943See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6944command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6945
6946@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6947@cindex import libraries
6948@item import libraries
69da35b5 6949The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6950libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6951regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6952archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6953support for creating such libraries provided with the
6954@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6955
c0065db7
RM
6956@item exporting DLL symbols
6957@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6958The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6959
6960@table @emph
6961@item using auto-export functionality
6962@cindex using auto-export functionality
6963By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6964which is controlled by the following command line options:
6965
0a5d968e
NC
6966@itemize
6967@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6968@item --exclude-symbols
6969@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6970@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6971@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6972@end itemize
6973
09e2aba4
DK
6974When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6975(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6976symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6977often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6978private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 6979options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
6980exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6981final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6982
6983If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6984command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6985if either of the following are true:
6986
6987@itemize
6988@item A DEF file is used.
6989@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6990@end itemize
dc8465bf 6991
c0065db7
RM
6992@item using a DEF file
6993@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6994Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6995an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6996exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6997name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6998command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6999
7000@example
7001gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7002@end example
7003
0a5d968e
NC
7004Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7005@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7006
dc8465bf
NC
7007Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7008
7009@example
4b5bd4e7 7010LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7011
7012EXPORTS
7013foo
7014bar
7015_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7016another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7017var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7018doo = foo == foo2
7019eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7020@end example
dc8465bf 7021
7fcab871 7022This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7023symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7024alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7025by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7026@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7027@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7028export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7029in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7030symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7031
6b31ad16
DS
7032The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7033name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7034the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7035
b45619c0
NC
7036When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7037library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7038@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7039executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7040
7041With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7042specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7043non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7044
7045If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7046or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7047filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7048
4b5bd4e7
DS
7049The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7050
7051@example
7052EXPORTS
7053 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7054 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7055 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7056@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7057
7058Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7059@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7060@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7061@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7062Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7063@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7064string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7065
7066The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7067
7068@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7069will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7070by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7071linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7072library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7073
7074@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7075The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7076the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7077@code{*_imp__foo}).
7078
7079@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7080well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7081read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7082variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7083the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7084extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7085application will behave unexpectedly.
7086
7087@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7088it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7089symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7090API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7091the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7092
4b5bd4e7
DS
7093See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7094other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7095
7096@cindex creating a DEF file
7097While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7098with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7099
7100@item Using decorations
7101@cindex Using decorations
7102Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7103itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7104declared as:
7105
7106@example
7107__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7108__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7109@end example
7110
7111All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7112any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7113this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7114the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7115
7116Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7117decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7118instead:
7119
7120@example
7121__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7122__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7123@end example
7124
c0065db7
RM
7125This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7126when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7127variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7128code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7129of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7130omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7131@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7132information.
c0065db7 7133@end table
dc8465bf 7134
2ca22b03
NC
7135@cindex automatic data imports
7136@item automatic data imports
7137The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7138by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7139compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7140issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7141code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7142c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7143initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7144decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7145platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7146command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7147The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7148suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7149trigger the feature's use.
7150
c0065db7 7151auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7152additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7153
c0065db7 7154"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7155documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7156
c0065db7
RM
7157The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7158occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7159One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7160below.
7161
7162@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7163For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7164object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7165offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7166field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7167in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7168without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7169The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7170references.
7171
c0065db7
RM
7172The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7173be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7174themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7175runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7176compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7177support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7178run without error on an older system.
7179
c0065db7
RM
7180@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7181enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7182
7183@cindex direct linking to a dll
7184@item direct linking to a dll
7185The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7186including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7187libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7188traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7189libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7190function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7191though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7192storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7193tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7194large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7195
c0065db7 7196Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7197@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7198of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7199perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7200select the dll instead of an import library.
7201
2ca22b03 7202
69da35b5
NC
7203For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7204to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7205
7206@example
45e948fe
NC
7207libxxx.dll.a
7208xxx.dll.a
7209libxxx.a
7210xxx.lib
69da35b5 7211cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7212libxxx.dll
7213xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7214@end example
7215
69da35b5
NC
7216before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7217
c0065db7
RM
7218(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7219where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7220@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7221file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7222@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7223
c0065db7
RM
7224Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7225@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7226was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7227various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7228could coexist on the same machine.
7229
2ca22b03
NC
7230The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7231applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7232libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7233
7234@example
7235bin/
7236 cygxxx.dll
7237lib/
7238 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7239 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7240@end example
7241
c0065db7
RM
7242Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7243done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7244
72451. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7246@example
7247gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7248@end example
2ca22b03 7249
69da35b5
NC
7250However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7251(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7252@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7253not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7254
2ca22b03
NC
72552. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7256directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7257should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7258making the app/dll.
7259
7260@example
7261ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7262@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7263
7264Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7265
7266@example
7267gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7268@end example
69da35b5
NC
7269
7270This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7271perfectly legal
7272
7273@example
7274bin/
7275 cygxxx-5.dll
7276lib/
c0065db7 7277 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7278@end example
7279
dc8465bf 7280Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7281even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7282@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7283
7284Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7285wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7286
72871. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7288work with auto-imported data.
7289
dc8465bf
NC
72902. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7291import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7292symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7293for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7294possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7295
45e948fe
NC
72963. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7297critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7298in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7299stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7300
69da35b5 7301So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7302true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7303a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7304binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7305massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7306requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7307will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7308
c0065db7 7309@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7310@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7311@item adding additional names
7312Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7313A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7314exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7315when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7316import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7317
c0065db7 7318@example
dc8465bf
NC
7319LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7320
7321EXPORTS
c0065db7 7322foo
dc8465bf 7323_foo = foo
c0065db7 7324@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7325
7326The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7327
7328Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7329source code using the "weak" attribute:
7330
c0065db7
RM
7331@example
7332void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7333void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7334@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7335
7336See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7337symbols.
7338
7339@item renaming symbols
7340Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7341kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7342@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7343DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7344created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7345
c0065db7 7346@example
dc8465bf
NC
7347LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7348
7349EXPORTS
7350_foo = foo
c0065db7 7351@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7352
7353The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7354@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7355@end table
dc8465bf 7356
0a5d968e 7357Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7358unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7359If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7360@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7361that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7362@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7363renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7364to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7365the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7366In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7367which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7368
7369@cindex weak externals
7370@item weak externals
7371The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7372weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7373defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7374are three variants of weak externals:
7375@itemize
7376@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7377called lazy externals.
7378@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7379This form is not presently implemented.
7380@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7381implemented.
7382@end itemize
7383As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7384are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7385uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7386
7387@cindex aligned common symbols
7388@item aligned common symbols
7389As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7390desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7391the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7392carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7393by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7394tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7395but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7396warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7397@end table
7398
7399@ifclear GENERIC
7400@lowersections
7401@end ifclear
7402@end ifset
7403
e0001a05
NC
7404@ifset XTENSA
7405@ifclear GENERIC
7406@raisesections
7407@end ifclear
7408
7409@node Xtensa
7410@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7411
7412@cindex Xtensa processors
7413The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7414@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7415specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7416keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7417example, with the command:
7418
7419@smallexample
7420SECTIONS
7421@{
7422 .text : @{
7423 *(.literal .text)
7424 @}
7425@}
7426@end smallexample
7427
7428@noindent
7429@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7430and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7431literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7432interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7433group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7434files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7435and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7436
43cd72b9 7437@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7438@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7439Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7440provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7441is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7442literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7443will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7444location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7445the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7446unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7447@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7448range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7449
7450For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7451to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7452instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7453instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7454instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7455@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7456hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7457By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7458switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7459density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7460instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7461performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7462linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7463a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7464
7465The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7466control the linker:
7467
7468@cindex Xtensa options
7469@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7470@item --size-opt
7471When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7472more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7473no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7474alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7475preserve the correctness of the code.
7476@end table
e0001a05
NC
7477
7478@ifclear GENERIC
7479@lowersections
7480@end ifclear
7481@end ifset
7482
252b5132
RH
7483@ifclear SingleFormat
7484@node BFD
7485@chapter BFD
7486
7487@cindex back end
7488@cindex object file management
7489@cindex object formats available
7490@kindex objdump -i
7491The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7492These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7493object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7494format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7495it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7496associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7497object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7498(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7499list all the formats available for your configuration.
7500
7501@cindex BFD requirements
7502@cindex requirements for BFD
7503As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7504several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7505BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7506formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7507been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7508BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7509may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7510
7511One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7512mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7513useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7514conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7515
7516@menu
7517* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7518@end menu
7519
7520@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7521@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7522@cindex opening object files
7523@include bfdsumm.texi
7524@end ifclear
7525
7526@node Reporting Bugs
7527@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7528@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7529@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7530
ff5dcc92 7531Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7532
7533Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7534it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7535to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7536work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7537@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7538
7539In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7540information that enables us to fix the bug.
7541
7542@menu
7543* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7544* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7545@end menu
7546
7547@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7548@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7549@cindex bug criteria
7550
7551If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7552
7553@itemize @bullet
7554@cindex fatal signal
7555@cindex linker crash
7556@cindex crash of linker
7557@item
7558If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7559@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7560
7561@cindex error on valid input
7562@item
ff5dcc92 7563If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7564
7565@cindex invalid input
7566@item
ff5dcc92 7567If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7568may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7569object files are correct.
7570
7571@item
7572If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7573improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7574@end itemize
7575
7576@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7577@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7578@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7579@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7580
7581A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7582products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7583recommend you contact that organization first.
7584
7585You can find contact information for many support companies and
7586individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7587distribution.
7588
ad22bfe8 7589@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7590Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7591@value{BUGURL}.
7592@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7593
7594The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7595@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7596fact or leave it out, state it!
7597
7598Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7599problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7600assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7601matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7602the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7603location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7604were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7605into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7606specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7607and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7608
7609Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7610the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7611on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7612
7613Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7614bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7615respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7616You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7617
7618To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7619
7620@itemize @bullet
7621@item
ff5dcc92 7622The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7623the @samp{--version} argument.
7624
7625Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7626the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7627
7628@item
ff5dcc92 7629Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7630patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7631
7632@item
7633The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7634version number.
7635
7636@item
ff5dcc92 7637What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7638``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7639
7640@item
7641The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7642observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7643list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7644sufficient.
7645
7646If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7647and then we might not encounter the bug.
7648
7649@item
7650A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7651bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7652provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7653bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7654state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7655requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7656we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7657attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7658
7659If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7660@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7661object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7662@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7663how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7664
7665@item
7666A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7667incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7668
ff5dcc92 7669Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7670will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7671not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7672a chance to make a mistake.
7673
7674Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7675say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7676copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7677C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7678and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7679fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7680you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7681any conclusion from our observations.
7682
7683@item
ff5dcc92 7684If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7685diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7686@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7687If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7688context, not by line number.
7689
7690The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7691sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7692@end itemize
7693
7694Here are some things that are not necessary:
7695
7696@itemize @bullet
7697@item
7698A description of the envelope of the bug.
7699
7700Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7701which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7702changes will not affect it.
7703
7704This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7705will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7706with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7707We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7708
7709Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7710of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7711output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7712less time, and so on.
7713
7714However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7715report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7716
7717@item
7718A patch for the bug.
7719
7720A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7721the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7722a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7723to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7724
ff5dcc92 7725Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7726construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7727through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7728able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7729fixed.
7730
7731And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7732patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7733help us to understand.
7734
7735@item
7736A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7737
7738Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7739things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7740@end itemize
7741
7742@node MRI
7743@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7744@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7745To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7746linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7747alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7748described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7749simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7750@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7751linker commands; these commands are described here.
7752
7753In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7754file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7755features to make use of them.
7756
7757You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7758@samp{-c} command-line option.
7759
7760Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7761command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7762blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7763MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7764issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7765
7766Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7767
7768You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7769lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7770The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7771
7772@table @code
7773@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7774@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7775@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7776Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7777the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7778@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7779your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7780script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7781commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7782input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7783@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7784
7785@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7786@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7787Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7788in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7789
7790@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7791
7792@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7793@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7794Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7795@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7796
7797@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7798@item BASE @var{expression}
7799Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7800absolute addresses) in the output file.
7801
7802@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7803@item CHIP @var{expression}
7804@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7805This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7806
7807@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7808@item END
7809This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7810
7811@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7812@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7813Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7814language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7815
7816@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7817@item
252b5132
RH
7818S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7819
7820@item
7821IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7822
7823@item
7824COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7825@samp{COFF}
7826@end enumerate
7827
7828@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7829@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7830Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7831@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7832
7833The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7834same line, with no change in its effect.
7835
7836@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7837@item LOAD @var{filename}
7838@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7839Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7840same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7841command line.
7842
7843@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7844@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7845@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7846MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7847option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7848
7849@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7850@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7851@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7852Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7853order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7854script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7855sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7856file, in the order specified.
7857
7858@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7859@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7860@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7861@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7862Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7863@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7864
7865@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7866@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7867@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7868@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7869You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7870specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7871If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7872@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7873@end table
7874
793c5807
NC
7875@node GNU Free Documentation License
7876@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7877@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7878
370b66a1
CD
7879@node LD Index
7880@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7881
7882@printindex cp
7883
7884@tex
7ca01ed9 7885% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
7886% meantime:
7887\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7888\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7889\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7890\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7891\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7892\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7893\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7894\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7895\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 7896% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
7897@end tex
7898
252b5132 7899@bye
This page took 1.257978 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.